Professional Documents
Culture Documents
1
My Teamcenter Guide
Publication Number
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-17
2-40
2-42
2-42
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-1
3-2
3-4
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-11
3-13
3-15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-5
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-9
4-10
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-2
5-6
5-6
5-9
5-14
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-21
5-25
5-28
5-29
5-32
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-1
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-6
6-8
6-9
6-11
My Teamcenter Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-8
7-9
7-11
7-11
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-13
PLM00046 I
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-9
8-9
8-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-1
9-1
9-3
9-7
9-7
9-8
9-8
9-8
9-9
9-11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
10-1
10-2
10-2
10-4
10-4
10-5
10-7
10-7
10-7
10-8
10-8
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 11-1
. 11-2
. 11-3
. 11-4
. 11-7
. 11-8
. 11-9
11-10
11-11
My Teamcenter Guide
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 12-1
. 12-3
. 12-9
12-14
12-15
12-18
12-18
12-18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 13-1
. 13-1
. 13-4
. 13-5
. 13-7
13-16
13-21
13-41
13-43
13-44
13-49
13-50
13-54
13-54
13-58
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 14-1
. 14-1
. 14-3
. 14-5
. 14-6
. 14-6
. 14-7
. 14-9
14-10
14-11
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15-1
15-3
15-3
15-4
15-5
15-6
15-6
15-7
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Contents
....
....
....
...
....
....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16-1
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17-1
17-1
17-2
17-2
17-3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18-1
18-1
18-2
18-3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19-1
19-1
19-1
19-2
19-2
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20-1
20-1
20-6
20-8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 21-1
. 21-1
. 21-4
21-11
21-17
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 22-1
. 22-5
. 22-5
. 22-7
. 22-8
. 22-8
22-11
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Contents
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
25-1
25-1
25-1
25-2
25-3
25-3
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
Figures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
Overview of My Teamcenter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
Overview of My Teamcenter
The My Teamcenter application is the workspace you use to manage your product
information. My Teamcenter serves as the main access point for many commonly
used functions, such as object creation, checkin/checkout, task management, and
query execution in both the rich client and the thin client. The My Teamcenter Guide
presents the full range of capabilities provided in the rich client.
The Teamcenter thin client is a Web-browser interface you can use to navigate
to various Teamcenter objects and functions. Access is available to the same
Teamcenter server and data as the rich client uses. No thin client software
is required on a Teamcenter client. The thin client interface can be used to
perform many of the same tasks you can perform in the rich client interface.
However, there are fewer distinct applications available in the thin client, and
administrative tasks cannot be performed in this interface.
For information about the capabilities provided by the thin client, see the Thin
Client Interface Guide.
For an overview of Teamcenter functionality and clients, see Getting Started with
Teamcenter.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
1-1
Chapter 1
Enable My
Teamcenter
Configure My
Teamcenter
Perspectives
Are containers for a set of views and editors that exist within the perspective.
1-2
In applications that use multiple views, you can add and rearrange views to
display multiple sets of information simultaneously within a perspective.
You can save a rearranged perspective with the current name, or create a
new perspective by saving the new arrangement of views with a new name.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
In some Teamcenter applications, using rich client views and view networks, you
can navigate to a hierarchy of information, display information about selected
objects, open an editor, or display properties.
o
Views that work with related information typically react to selection changes
in other views.
Any view can be opened in any perspective, and any combination of views
can be saved in a current perspective or in a new perspective.
A view network consists of a primary view and one or more secondary views
that are associated. View networks can be arranged in a single view folder
or in multiple view folders.
Objects selected in a view may provide context for a shortcut menu. The
shortcut menu is usually displayed by right-clicking.
For information about using the shortcut menu, see Shortcut menus.
Note
If your site has online help installed, you can access application and view
help from the rich client Help menu or by pressing F1. Some views, such
as Communication Monitor, Print Object, and Performance Monitor,
are auxiliary views that may be used for debugging and that may not be
displayed automatically by any particular perspective.
For more information about auxiliary views, see the Client Customization
Programmers Guide.
For more information about perspectives and views and changing the layout of your
rich client window, see the Rich Client Interface Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
1-3
Chapter
My Teamcenter fundamentals
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-5
2-9
2-11
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-16
My Teamcenter menus . . . . . . .
File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File New menu . . . . . . .
File New Item dialog box
Edit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actions menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Window menu . . . . . . . . . . .
Translation menu . . . . . . . .
Help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shortcut menus . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-17
2-17
2-19
2-23
2-23
2-26
2-27
2-32
2-33
2-34
2-35
2-36
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-42
2-43
2-43
2-44
2-44
2-45
2-46
2-46
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
My Teamcenter fundamentals
PLM00046 I
Search for objects, both in your local site database and at remote sites, using
predefined queries.
My Teamcenter Guide
2-1
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter views
The Teamcenter rich client provides the My Teamcenter perspective consisting of
multiple views designed to provide access to the latest Teamcenter features and
functionality.
By default, the My Teamcenter perspective displays the Home component view
beside the navigation pane, and the Summary, Details, Impact Analysis, Viewer,
JT Preview, and Process History views. Additional views can be used in the My
Teamcenter perspective, such as the MS Word, Search, and Simple Search views.
For a list of views provided with the My Teamcenter perspective, choose
WindowShow ViewOther to display the Show View dialog box, and then expand
the Teamcenter folder.
Component views
The Teamcenter Component view is opened by default by several Teamcenter
perspectives.
Component views support standard navigation functionality such as expand,
expand-all, and double-click, as well as standard context-specific shortcut menus.
Select an object in the navigation pane, right-click, and choose Send toMy
Teamcenter.
In the My Teamcenter perspective, the default component view is the Home view,
and every object opened in My Teamcenter gets its own component view.
When you open an object in My Teamcenter, a new component view opens with
the opened object as the root.
2-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
This view lets you navigate the content of the opened object. For example, opening
My Worklist from the navigation pane opens an instance of the component view
with your worklist as the root node. Similarly, opening the Newstuff folder opens a
component view with your Newstuff as the root node and clicking My Projects opens
a component view with your current project as the default node.
A component view includes the following elements:
View menu
Contains:
o
The Move menu, for moving selected objects to a different level in the tree
display.
Up moves a selected folder up (for example, closer to the top-level folder) to
the area of the tree that you specify.
Down moves a selected folder down to a location that you specify.
Top moves a selected folder to the top of the tree.
Bottom moves a selected folder to the bottom of the tree.
Summary view
The Summary view lets you see properties for a selected object and edit attributes
such as name or description for supported items for which you have appropriate
permissions.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-3
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Chapter 2
The configuration and contents of the Summary view vary according to the
information display configured for type of object selected.
2-4
The Summary view toolbar includes buttons to let you check out and edit the
properties of objects, check in and save edited properties, cancel checkout, or
save changes and keep checked out.
The area at the top of the view displays basic information about the selected
object.
The Summary view may include the following expandable and collapsible areas:
o
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Tabs, such as Overview, Attachments, and History are displayed, as needed and
as configured, to organize information about the selected object.
Action buttons, such as Copy, Save As, Revise, and Submit for Review are
displayed. The location of these buttons vary based on the objects selected.
When the functionality is enabled, you can see when other users are available
for instant messaging with Microsoft Office Communicator. You can view the
current status of the owning and last modified users, and you can click the
Microsoft Office Communicator symbol in Teamcenter to initiate communication.
Within a specified area, the groups of objects within each tab (object sets) are
configured in the XRT style sheet. Each group of information can be configured
to display in table, list, tree, or thumbnail format. Each can also be supported
by action command buttons such as Cut and Copy.
For information about creating object sets, see the Client Customization
Programmers Guide.
Individual columns can be moved left or right by clicking and dragging the
column head to a new position.
With objects selected in the table, you can right-click a column head to display
the shortcut menu.
Note
The default display order for column contents in most views is specified by
the Teamcenter server. In the rich client, you can click a column header to
cycle through ascending, descending, and server default order. For rich client
Teamcenter component (tree) views and for the Search Results view, use
EditOptions to display the Options dialog box, and then select UI and click
the General tab to select a Tree displaying order option.
Refresh
Refreshes the display in the Details view.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-5
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Chapter 2
Column
Displays the Column Management dialog box. Use this dialog box to select
properties to display and column order.
Select Default and click Apply to restore the default column configuration
to the Details view table display. This restores columns removed by the
right-click Remove this column command.
Sort
Provides three levels of sorting.
Filter
Displays the Auto Filter dialog box with available condition expressions.
o
The ALL option displays properties for all the children of the object currently
selected in the component view.
You can use the Filter Condition Editor to create condition expressions for
filtering the display.
Expressions cannot be edited after they are listed in the Auto Filter dialog
box, but they can be deleted.
Teamcenter retains your filter condition expressions until you delete them.
2-6
The = = operator tests for an exact match. The = operator tests for a
match but is not case sensitive.
To expand the expression with additional conditions, use the ADD and OR
operators.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Click OK to add the condition expression to the Auto Filter dialog box.
Find In Display
Displays the Find In Display dialog box that lets you find objects based on
property names and search values.
Print Table
Lets you print to either HTML/Text using the Teamcenter Print dialog box, or
Graphics, using the system printers.
With Headers
Without Headers
For Query
This option displays the Select Columns For Query dialog box in which you
can select specific properties to copy.
Objects to Word
Displays the Export To Word dialog box. You can specify:
o
Output: Static Snapshot, Live Integration with Word, Export for Markup
Live options: Export for structure editing and work offline, Check out
objects before export
Note
The checkout applies to all objects being exported. You should use
this option carefully if you are exporting a large set of objects or
perhaps an entire specification.
Template override
To use a Word export template other than the default, select a template from
the Specification Templates list or select an object type from the Override
Object Template for: list. If you select an object type from the Override
Object Template for: list, you then select a template from the Available
Object Templates list to add to the table.
Copy URL
The URL Generated message is displayed, confirming that the URL for the
export document is in your Windows Clipboard and showing the URL details.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-7
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Chapter 2
Note
OK
Generate the export Word file.
Objects to Excel
Displays the Export To Excel dialog box. You can specify:
o
Object Selection
Either Export Selected Objects or Export All Objects in View.
Output Template
Either Export All Visible Columns or Use Excel Template.
When you export all visible columns to Excel, the relation column is not
exported because the relation is not a property on the object.
The Use Excel Template option provides access to a list of templates.
Output
Either Static Snapshot, Live integration with Excel (Interactive), Live
integration with Excel (Bulk Mode) or Work Offline and Import.
Note
To check out objects while exporting to live Excel, select Check out objects
before export.
Note
The checkout applies to all objects being exported. You should use
this option carefully if you are exporting a large set of objects or
perhaps an entire specification.
Copy URL
The URL Generated message is displayed, confirming that the URL for the
export document is in your Windows Clipboard and showing the URL details.
2-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Note
OK
Generate the export Excel file.
Objects to CSV
Displays the Export To CSV dialog box to export Teamcenter data in
comma-separated value (CSV) format. You can specify:
o
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-9
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
3. (Optional) Click the Move Up and Move Down buttons, to the right of the
Displayed Columns list, to adjust the order of the displayed columns.
4. Click Apply to apply the configuration to the current view, or click Save to save
the configuration for later use.
Note
You can use the Apply Column Configuration command on the view
menu to:
You can use the Save Column Configuration command on the view
menu to save the current configuration of the table display.
5. Click Close to close the Column Management dialog box.
2-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Viewer view
The content displayed in the Viewer view depends on the type of the object selected
in the current component view or in the Details view.
To display Microsoft Office datasets in the Viewer view, display the Viewer view
and then click the dataset in the component view.
Note
in a component view or in
For Microsoft Office 2007, the Microsoft Fix it 50298 patch is available at
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/927009.
For Microsoft Office 2010, use the Microsoft Let me fix it myself method
available at http://support.microsoft.com/kb/982995.
Note
The patches are designed for systems using Internet Explorer 7 and
Internet Explorer 8.
If the patch installer displays a message indicating the fix does not
apply to your operating system or application version, use the Let me
fix it myself method described on the link pages to create the registry
file manually and apply the patch.
Embedded Word is not supported when running the 32-bit version of
Microsoft Word with the 64-bit Teamcenter rich client.
For information about the working with 2D and 3D data, see Getting Started
with Product Visualization.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-11
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Chapter 2
For information about creating and working with snapshots, see the Lifecycle
Visualization Integration Guide.
To display the object properties for the item or item revision with no associated
displayable datasets, select the item or item revision.
Note
When the functionality is enabled, you can see when other users are
available for instant messaging with Microsoft Office Communicator.
You can view the current status of the owning and last modified
users, and you can click the Microsoft Office Communicator symbol in
Teamcenter to initiate communication.
To display Web Link object properties in the Viewer view, select a URL link
object in a component view.
Note
To display the content of a text file or PDF file in the Viewer view, or to display or
edit standard office files such as Microsoft Word or Excel files in the Viewer view,
click on the dataset object in a component view or a Details view.
Note
2-12
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Caution
If an item or item revision is selected, the viewer displays the associated image,
printed circuit board, schematic, or JT data.
View and markup of parts, printed circuit boards, schematics, drawings and
images, without having to launch the stand-alone viewer or the Lifecycle Viewer.
2D GDT Markup
Create 2D GD&T markups.
2D Markup
Create 2D markups.
2D Measurement
Perform 2D measurements.
2D Multipage
Navigate among pages in multiple-page 2D images or documents.
2D Viewing
Pan, zoom, rotate, and flip 2D images.
3D Markup
Create 3D markups.
3D Measurement
Perform 3D measurements.
3D Navigation
Pan, rotate, and zoom 3D models.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-13
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Chapter 2
3D PMI
View and manipulate PMI in your model.
3D Section
Create 3D cross sections.
3D Selection
Select parts and pick part entities.
3D Standard Views
Examine your model from preset viewing angles.
ECAD Base
Manipulate the view of ECAD document layers, control layer color and visibility,
search, and create reports.
ECAD Markup
Create ECAD markups.
ECAD Multipage
Navigate among pages in multiple-page schematic documents.
ECAD Viewing
Pan, zoom, rotate, and flip image.
Print
Print documents.
2-14
defaultViewerConfig.VIEWERCONFIG
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Use this preference to specify the default Viewer view configuration by defining
which Generic Relationship Management (GRM) rules to expand and the viewer
to use for each type of object specified in the preference.
<viewer-config-ID>.VIEWERCONFIG
Use this preference to specify an alternate Viewer view configuration instead
of the defaultViewerConfig.VIEWERCONFIG preference. This preference
defines which Generic Relationship Management (GRM) rules to expand, and
the viewer to use for each type of object specified in the preference.
o
Note
Viewer.VIEWERCONFIGTOLOAD
Use this preference to specify the Viewer view configuration to load. This
preference must point to a .VIEWERCONFIG preference name.
By default, this preference points to the
defaultViewerConfig.VIEWERCONFIG preference. To point to an alternate
preference, enter a <viewer_config_id>.VIEWERCONFIG preference name.
For information about how to define a custom viewer, see the Client Customization
Programmers Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-15
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Chapter 2
The Impact Analysis view responds to the current selection in the active component
view and provides the following functionality:
Search Text box and Find button. Search supports the following actions:
o
Press F3, Page Down, or Down to find the next matching object.
Open button
to display the Open by Name dialog box that lets you use names,
wildcard characters, and revision level to find objects. You can copy found objects
to the clipboard, load all found components into the table, and step through
found components in groups.
Where
Select either Referenced or Used.
Depth
Select One Level, All Levels, or Top Level.
2-16
Where-Used/Referenced Report
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Note
Note
This option returns all instances and classes found in the database that
contain references to the selected instance.
For more information, see the Preferences and Environment Variables
Reference.
My Teamcenter menus
Menu commands are available in an initial installation of the Teamcenter software.
Note
The My Teamcenter menu commands available at your site may differ based
on site-specific configuration, customization, and application integration.
File menu
Use File menu commands to create and manage your data objects, close an
application, and exit the rich client.
Command
Purpose
New
Open
PLM00046 I
Open With
View
View With
My Teamcenter Guide
2-17
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
View/Markup
Cancel
Signing
Save
Save As
Revise
Diagramming Lets you create or edit diagram templates used in functional and
logical decompositions.
For information about working with diagramming, see the Systems
Engineering Guide.
Close
Print...
Exit
2-18
My Teamcenter Guide
Exits the rich client and all of the applications that are running in
the work session.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Purpose
Creates Teamcenter objects such as items, folders, forms,
datasets, URL links, IDs, item elements, BOM view revisions,
structure contexts, collaboration contexts, and work contexts, as
well as interface definition, process variable, connection, signal,
process, change, envelope, CAE item, and schedule objects.
For FileNewItem menu command descriptions, see File New
Item dialog box.
Folder
Form
Dataset
URL
ID
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-19
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Item Element
BOMView
Revision
Structure
Context
Configuration
Context
Collaboration
Context
2-20
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Work Context
Service
Request
Service
Catalog
Connection
Interface
Definition
Process
Variable
Signal
Workflow
Process
Workflow
Sub-Process
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-21
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Issue Report
Change
Envelope
Vendor
Management
Part
Design
CAE Item
Schedule
Parameter
Management,
Product
Variant, and
Product
Variant Intent
Software
Design
Component
2-22
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
The available new item options vary according to preference settings and
the applications installed and enabled at your site. The following table lists
descriptions of typical items.
Command
DMTemplate
Purpose
Creates objects that can have attached starting files for
creating objects of other item types. These template objects are
application specific and can include any kind of starting files
and preview or thumbnail image files, useful for engineering
applications such as NX.
Document
Functionality
Item
Paragraph,
Create Paragraph, Requirement, and RequirementSpec
Requirement, and requirements objects for use with Systems Engineering.
RequirementSpec
For more information about these options, see the Systems
Engineering Guide.
Review_Pckg
Edit menu
Use the Edit menu commands to perform basic editing tasks on selected objects,
view and/or change user settings and preferences, and to move selected objects
around in the tree structure.
Note
PLM00046 I
You must have read and write privileges to the objects you want to cut, copy,
or paste.
Command
Purpose
Cut
Copy
My Teamcenter Guide
2-23
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Copy
Workflow
Process
Paste
Note
Note
Paste Special
Allows you to specify a relation type rather than using the default
paste relation when pasting an object reference into an item or
item revision.
Note
Properties
Delete
Deletes a selected data object from the database. You must have
delete permission for the object to use this command. You can also
use the Explore Selected Components option (available in the
Delete dialog box) to select related objects for deletion by either
selecting them from the tree or applying type/relation rules.
Note
2-24
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
For information about locating references to objects, see
the Rich Client Interface Guide.
Properties on
Relation
Make Immune
Remove
Immunity
Latest
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-25
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
User Setting
Options
Lets you set preferences for a wide variety of user interface and
application display and processing attributes.
For more information about options and preferences, see the Rich
Client Interface Guide.
Change
Ownership
Calendar
Displays the Edit Resource Calendar dialog box to let you edit
your resource calendar.
If you do not have a resource calendar, this command lets you
create one.
Note
Replace
Parametric
Requirement
Revision
Attach
Attaches a parametric requirement or a custom note to an item or
Requirements/ item revision.
Notes
For information about parametric requirements, see Attach a
parametric requirement to an item or item revision.
View menu
View menu commands let you refresh your display, with hierarchical information,
and see object access and user information.
2-26
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Refresh
Refresh
Window
Access
Named
References
Current Users
Properties
Audit
Organization
Effectivity
Lets you display the Effectivity dialog box to let you create, edit,
copy, and delete effectivities for an item. Also lets you view
effectivity mappings of revisions for configuration items.
Tools menu
Use the Tools menu commands to perform actions on objects, such as checking them
in and out, and to create and manage address lists and generate reports.
Command
Purpose
Check-In/Out
ID Display Rule Sets the display rule for items and item revisions based on
alternate identifier context.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-27
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Process
Change
Selector
Project
Validation
Lets you run validation agents and view results. Agents validate
the attributes of relevant targets under a selected data object,
using third-party software applications, based on criteria
established by your local administrator.
Review Issue
Assign Work
Context
Manage Global Lets you work with global alternates. A global alternate part is
interchangeable with another part, regardless of where the part
Alternates
is being used in the product structure.
For more information about global alternates, see the Structure
Manager Guide.
Baseline
Subscribe
Subscription
Manager
2-28
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Add Design to
Opens the Add Design to Product wizard that guides you through
adding your CAD design to an installation assembly attached to
an architecture breakdown element.
Product
Opens the Add Part to Product wizard that guides you through
adding an enterprise resource planning (ERP) part to an
architecture breakdown element.
For information about adding parts to products, see the Platform
Designer Guide.
Multi-Site
Collaboration
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-29
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
about the Access Manager rules that control publishing
privileges.
For more information about Multi-Site Collaboration menu
commands, see the Multi-Site Collaboration Guide.
Import
Export
Override Word
templates
Send Data To
Send
Additional
Data To
Vendor
Management
Lets you work with vendor, vendor role, and bid package line
item data.
For more information about vendor management functionality,
see Vendor management overview.
2-30
Address List
Intermediate
Data Capture
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Open Live
Excel
For more information about working in live Excel files, see the
Extensions for Microsoft Office Guide.
Compare
Contents
Trace Report
Check Index
Status
Displays the status of the full-text search index for the selected
objects and also allows you to refresh the index for these objects.
Site
CheckInOut
Localization
Reports
Assign
Participants
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-31
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Part/Design
Actions menu
The Actions menu contains commands used for setting the actions of tasks. All
commands on the Actions menu require privileged user status to function.
If a task is designated to process in the background, all actions except Perform and
Assign are processed in the background. The Perform and Assign action execute
in the foreground.
Note
Command
Description
Perform
Displays the Perform dialog box for the selected task. The contents
of the dialog box varies depending on the task selected.
Assign
Start
Complete
Suspend
Resume
Promote
Places the selected task into a Skipped state, and starts the
successor tasks in the workflow process. For Review and Route
tasks, the successor task can be either along the approve or reject
path, depending on the users selection.
Undo
Stand-In
Allows you to perform the task while allowing the original user to
retain control.
Autoset
When the selected item or task has a work context defined, sets
Current
your user settings so you can work with the current item or task.
WorkContext
For more information about work context, see Managing work
contexts.
2-32
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Window menu
Use the Window menu commands to open a new application window and customize
your desktop.
Command
Purpose
Open
Perspective
Show View
Save
Perspective
As
Reset
Perspective
Close
Perspective
Preferences
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-33
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Chapter 2
Command
Purpose
Security
Standard Eclipse functionality.
Teamcenter
Show traditional style tabs
Select to display rectangular tabs instead of rounded tabs.
Minimum characters for view title
Specifies the minimum number of characters displayed in view
titles prior to putting titles into the associated view list.
Search
Select to set a wide range of search options.
For information about setting search options, see the Rich
Client Interface Guide.
View Network Presentation
Select to set colors and patterns for view networks.
For information about changing view network color and pattern
presentation options, see the Rich Client Interface Guide.
Note
Toolbar
Navigation
Pane
Full Screen
Translation menu
Use Translation menu commands to translate:
Document dataset files from Microsoft Word format to zipped files and PDF files.
2-34
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Note
Purpose
Translate
Administration Displays the Request Administration dialog box and queries the
Console
database to retrieve translation processes.
For information about administering Dispatcher, see Getting
Started with Dispatcher (Translation Management).
Help menu
You can use the Help menu commands to access the online help index, see
view-specific help, and find information about the application that is currently
running in the rich client interface.
Online help is not always installed, and for some views, online help is not available
from the HelpCurrent Application menu command, the F1 key, or both.
When online help for a view is not available from the function key or menu command,
follow these steps:
1. Choose HelpHelp Library.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-35
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Shortcut menus
When you select an object in a rich client view, you can often use the right mouse
button to display a shortcut menu containing commands relevant to the currently
active application or the currently selected object. The shortcut menu is dynamic;
the available commands reflect the current context.
Shortcut menu commands are referenced and described in procedure and reference
documentation in context of the application or object selection to which the
commands apply.
Note
On some Linux platforms, you must hold down the right mouse button while
you select the desired command.
Purpose
Copy
Reference
New Change
in context
New
Cut
Copy
2-36
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Paste
Pin to Launch
Pad
Unpin from
Launch Pad
Resequence
Structure
Resequences a structure.
Generate
Report
For information about using the Launch Pad application, see the
Rich Client Interface Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-37
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Check In/Out
Purge
Make Immune
Remove
Immunity
Refresh
Edit Properties For selected, single editable objects, displays the Check-Out
dialog box, and then displays the Edit Properties dialog box for
the selected object.
For more information, see the Overview of object properties.
View
Properties
Properties on
Relation
2-38
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Access
Project
License
Internal Trace
Report
Add Design to
Product
Opens the Add Design to Product wizard that guides you through
adding your CAD design to an installation assembly attached to
an architecture breakdown element.
For information about adding designs to products, see the
Platform Designer Guide.
Add Part to
Product
Opens the Add Part to Product wizard that guides you through
adding an enterprise resource planning (ERP) part to an
architecture breakdown element.
For information about adding parts to products, see the Platform
Designer Guide.
Manage Global Lets you work with global alternates. A global alternate part is
Alternates
interchangeable with another part, regardless of where the part
is being used in the product structure.
For more information about global alternates, see the Structure
Manager Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-39
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Command
Purpose
Multisite
For data shared with participating sites in a distributed network,
Synchronization lets you update objects, components, and assemblies.
For more information about sharing data in a distributed
network, see the Multi-Site Collaboration Guide.
Subscribe
Subscription
Manager
Add To
Favorites
Compare
Contents
Note
My Teamcenter toolbar
Several buttons to access functionality are located on the My Teamcenter toolbar.
Button
Soft Abort
Purpose
This button is active when an application is loading or
when the system is processing data for a task. However,
the soft abort operation is a logical interrupt that can
be performed only when the system encounters an
interruption between two processes. The following
examples illustrate some situations in which you can use
the soft abort button:
Creating a folder
When a folder is created, the system creates the folder,
pastes the folder, and opens the folder (if Open on
Create is selected). The only points in this process at
which the Soft Abort button can be used to stop the
process are between when the folder has been created
and is about to be pasted or when the folder has been
pasted and is about to be opened.
2-40
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Button
Purpose
Deleting objects
When objects are deleted, the system loads the objects
and then deletes them. The only point in this process
at which the Soft Abort button can be used to stop the
process is between when the object is loaded and when
it is deleted, or if deleting multiple objects, the process
can be stopped between when the previous object has
been deleted and the next object is loaded.
Running searches
When a query is run, the system executes the query
and then loads the objects. The only point at which
the operation can be stopped is after the query has
run but before the objects are loaded.
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Open Worklist
Refresh selected
object
Open selected object
Display properties
Display accessibility
Perform Task
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-41
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Chapter 2
Button
Purpose
Add Design to
Product
Navigation Pane
Folders
Back
Forward
2-42
The My Worklist view has an Inbox associated with workflow tasks you must
perform or you can track. These are not mail or e-mail.
Teamcenter mail lets you to send mail from within the Teamcenter interface,
including attachments and links, to other Teamcenter users. You can also send
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
e-mail from Teamcenter to recipients who are not Teamcenter users by specifying
a valid SMTP address.
Teamcenter mail is delivered to the Mailbox in your Home view in My
Teamcenter.
Teamcenter rich client and thin client users can see when other users are
available for instant messaging with Microsoft Office Communicator. Teamcenter
users can view the current status of the owning and last modified users and
can click the Microsoft Office Communicator symbol in Teamcenter to initiate
communication.
Note
You can also copy attachments to the clipboard and insert them in the
Attachments box.
2. Choose FileNewEnvelope.
3. Use one of the following methods to enter the addresses in the To box:
Type the addresses of the users, groups, address lists, or external recipients
in the To and/or CC boxes.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-43
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Type search criteria in the Search box to search by user ID, group, or
address list.
c.
,Groups
d. Select the users, groups, or address lists that you want to receive the
message, and click the To or CC buttons.
Tip
e.
You can remove recipients from the lists by selecting the user
and clicking the Remove button (). In addition, you can create a
new address list by clicking the Launch Address List button
and following the instructions described in Create an address list.
Click OK.
4. In the New Envelope dialog box, type the subject of the message in the Subject
box.
5. Type your message in the Message box.
Tip
Attachments are Teamcenter objects and are only valid when sending
Teamcenter mail. Teamcenter objects cannot be sent as attachments
of external mail messages.
2-44
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Search
Note
3. Type the names of the members or select the members, users and/or groups, that
you want to add to the address list. The members that you add to the address
list display in the Member(s) pane.
Type the name of the user or group and click the Add button.
Perform the following steps to select members to add to the address list:
a. Place the cursor in the New Member box, and click the Organization
button
b.
c.
Expand the tree, select the groups and/or users, and click OK.
The system displays the name of the user and/or group in the Member(s)
pane and the Organization Selection dialog box closes.
4. Click Close.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
2-45
Chapter 2
My Teamcenter fundamentals
Type the name of the user or group and click the Add button.
Perform the following steps to select members to add to the address list:
a. Place the cursor in the New Member box, and click the Organization
button
b.
c.
Expand the tree, select the groups and/or users, and click OK.
The system displays the name of the user and/or group in the Member(s)
pane and the Organization Selection dialog box closes.
4. Click Close.
5. To remove a user or group from the address list, select the member in the
Member(s) list and click the Remove button.
The system displays a confirmation message.
6. Click Yes to delete the selected member from the address list, click No to cancel
the delete operation, or click Close to cancel the operation and close the dialog
box.
Delete an address list
1. Choose ToolsAddress List.
2. In the Address List, select the name of the address list that you want to delete
and click the Remove button.
The system displays a confirmation message.
3. Click Yes to delete the selected address list, click No to cancel the delete
operation, or click Close to cancel the operation and close the dialog box.
2-46
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-10
3-10
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-17
3-18
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
Click Check-Out and Edit or press Alt+E to check out the objects.
Click Cancel or press Alt+C to cancel changes and close the dialog box.
For object properties, the Properties dialog box can incorporate a Check-Out and
Edit button that lets you quickly check out an object and edit applicable information
in an Edit Properties dialog box.
You can then:
Click Save and Check-In or press Alt+I to save changes, check in the object,
and close the dialog box.
Click Save or press Alt+S to save the changes and retain the dialog box.
Note
If you click Save or press Alt+S, and then click Cancel Check-Out or
press Alt+O, the changes are reverted and the checkout status for the
object is canceled.
Click Cancel Check-Out or press Alt+O to cancel the checkout without saving
the changes and close the dialog box.
Note
If any revision of an item has been released, the unit of measure cannot
be modified.
You can also find and replace string property values and add prefixes and
suffixes to values.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
3-1
Chapter 3
The system displays the properties of the selected object in the Edit Properties
dialog box. The properties that can be modified vary from object to object, and
you must have write access to make modifications.
Note
You cannot change ownership of the selected object from the Properties
dialog box. You must use the Change Ownership option on the Edit
menu.
3-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the
Explore dialog box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which
related objects are included.
b.
By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.
, Save
, Cancel Check-Out
, or Close
If errors occur during the update process, a dialog box displays the objects and
properties on which the failure occurred and states the cause of the failure. This
error report can be saved or printed to an HTML or text file.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
3-3
Chapter 3
You must have write access to modify object properties. If you do not
have access to one or more of the selected objects, an error message is
displayed.
The Common Modifiable Properties dialog box displays only those modifiable
properties that are common to all of the selected objects.
4. Select the cells corresponding to the property values that you want to modify.
You can select a single cell, multiple cells in the same column, or all cells in a
column. To select all cells, click the column header.
Note
3-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
This area displays either a box or a list depending on whether the values
associated with the selected properties are strings or lists of values.
When using the box to enter string values, you can click Cancel Changes
to revert to the last submitted value at any time prior to submitting the
changes.
The modifications are reflected in the table but are not updated in the database
until you click Apply or OK.
7. (Optional) Use the Additional Options feature to find and replace values or add
prefixes and suffixes. For more information about this feature, see Find and
replace property values and add prefixes and suffixes.
8. (Optional) Propagate the modified properties to related objects:
a. Click Explore Selected Components
The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the
Explore dialog box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which
related objects are included.
b.
By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
3-5
Chapter 3
, Save
, Cancel Check-Out
, or Close
If errors occur during the update process, a dialog box displays the objects and
properties on which the failure occurred and states the cause of the failure. This
error report can be saved or printed to an HTML or text file.
Note
Find and replace property values and add prefixes and suffixes
Note
The system displays the Change Owner/Group dialog box when the
Additional Options feature is used to modify the Owner or Group ID
properties.
For more information about changing object ownership, see Managing object
protection.
3-6
Option
Description
Find What
Prefix
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Option
Description
Replace With
Suffix
Pattern
Entire Word
Specifies that all of the characters in the Find What box must
be present to be considered as a match in the search.
Case Sensitive
Specifies that the case of the characters in the Find What box
must be matched during the search.
Clear button
Replace
Replace All
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
3-7
Chapter 3
Click Check-Out and Edit or press Alt+E to check out the objects.
Click Cancel or press Alt+C to cancel changes and close the dialog box.
The Properties dialog box for a dataset may display read-only boxes for
relationships such as UG Expressions, UG WAVE Geometry, and various
others. These boxes, which are normally blank, are used to display
relationship information stored in the database.
Note
To select contiguous objects, click the first object, press the Shift key,
and select the last object.
To select multiple noncontiguous objects, click the first object, press the
Control key, and select the remaining objects.
Click Check-Out and Edit or press Alt+E to check out the objects.
Click Cancel or press Alt+C to cancel changes and close the dialog box.
3-8
My Teamcenter Guide
For information about configuring data display in view tables, such as the
My Teamcenter Details view, see Configure the Details view table.
PLM00046 I
For ease of use, leave the Object and Type columns in the first and
second positions in the table.
2. Drag the column to the desired position in the table and release the mouse
button.
The column appears in the new position.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
3-9
Chapter 3
Note
1. Right-click a column header in the table pane and choose Insert column(s).
The Change Columns dialog box appears.
2. Double-click a category and select the object type for the properties you want to
display.
Note
Display only the properties that you view or change frequently. The
more properties that are displayed, the longer it takes to expand folders
and items.
3. Select the property you want to add to the table pane display from the Available
Columns list and click the Add the selected columns from Available Columns
to Displayed Columns button
.
The selected property appears in the Displayed Columns list.
Tip
You can also double-click the property in the Available Columns list to
add it to the Displayed Columns list.
4. Repeat step 3 for all property columns you want to add to the table pane display.
5. Click Apply to insert the columns into the current table pane display.
Note
You can use the Save Column Configuration command on the Table
Function Menu to save the current table pane display, including the
columns you inserted.
You can use the Apply a Column Configuration command on the Table
Function Menu to apply a saved configuration to the table pane display,
or modify a saved configuration.
6. (Optional) Click Save to save the properties you added to the Displayed
Columns list.
7. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
3-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Editable values that you change in the Excel file are immediately applied
to the database, and then are displayed in My Teamcenter. Furthermore,
values that you or other users change in the client are updated automatically
in the Excel file.
c.
To check out objects while exporting to live Excel, select Check out
objects before export.
Note
The check out applies to all objects being exported. You should
use this option carefully if you are exporting a large set of objects
or perhaps an entire specification.
d. Under Output Template, select a template from the Use Excel Template
list.
e.
f.
PLM00046 I
To open a file:
My Teamcenter Guide
3-11
Chapter 3
To change a value:
a. Double-click the cell that contains the value.
Warning
The choice list can be modified, and you may see different choices
from time to time.
If the choice list is a project-based conditional list of values, a
different list of choices may appear for one item than another.
This depends on whether the items are assigned to a project, to
which project each item is assigned, and if the applicable projects
have a different list of values for the same property.
If you have questions about the choice list, consult your
Teamcenter administrator.
In the choice list, select the choice or choices for the new value, and
then click another cell to close the list.
Buttons indicate a single-choice list. You can select only one choice.
Check boxes indicate a multiple-choice list, in which you can select
any combination of choices. Selecting an unchecked choice adds it to
the value, and selecting a checked choice removes it from the value.
In the box, enter the new value, and then press the Enter key.
For a date or numeric property, the value must match the valid
format for the property.
For a text property, any keyboard characters are valid, except that
the Name property value cannot contain double quotation marks.
You can also select the cell and enter the new value directly.
Note
3-12
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Select the destination cell, and then choose Excels EditPaste menu
command.
Note
If you cut the value and paste it into a different row, the value
remains with the source object in the database. Therefore, the
value is not moved in the Teamcenter client.
To hide or show rows, click the button in the heading of a property column,
and then select a filtering criterion from the popup list.
If you click No, the file remains on your computer as a temporary file.
If you click Yes, Excel displays the Save As dialog box, in which you assign
the file name, file type, and location. The file remains interactive with Excel
Live after you exit.
For more information about working in live Excel files, see the Extensions for
Microsoft Office Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
3-13
Chapter 3
For more information about editing object properties in live Word, see Editing
object properties.
Tip
Client for Office highlights the content control in the document window.
With the default object template applied, the output Word document contains the
following Teamcenter property values for each requirement and paragraph object:
The heading occupies a nested content control at the top of the main content
control for the object.
If you edit the heading, the Requirements pane displays a red asterisk (*) to
the right of the object.
The asterisk indicates that changes are pending for the object.
The Body Text property value is the rich text content of the requirement or
paragraph object.
Note
If you are working in a live Word export file, it may include a URL link
to body text. In this case, click the link to access and review or edit the
requirement content.
Each Word paragraph occupies a nested content control within the main
content control for the object.
If you place the cursor within the nested content control, the Requirements
pane displays a red asterisk (*) to the right of the object.
The asterisk indicates that changes are pending for the object. However, the
asterisk appears whether or not you edit the Body Text property value.
Note
You can change, copy, move, or delete a value by placing the cursor inside the related
content control and using Word editing features.
3-14
Any updates you make and save to the requirements content in live Word are
reflected in Teamcenter.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Edits are not applied to the corresponding objects until you commit the changes
to Teamcenter. You can cancel the edits by closing the document without saving
it.
For more information about committing changes to Teamcenter, see the Client
for Microsoft Office Guide.
Caution
Relation properties
Objects are associated by relations.
For example, datasets (secondary objects) are associated with item revisions
(primary objects) using relation objects. The meaning of the secondary object may
vary from one context to another. Properties on relations enable you to record
information specific to the association or context in which the object is used.
Your administrator can create custom attributes (properties) to apply to relation
business objects in the system.
A single item can be associated to multiple items or contexts. Objects are associated
by relations, and the meaning of the relation may vary from one context to another.
For information about creating relation business objects and adding properties to
relations, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide.
PLM00046 I
If you click the Apply All button, the values provided for the first relation
are set for the other relations if you selected multiple secondary object
items. Click Next to enter different values for the other relations.
My Teamcenter Guide
3-15
Chapter 3
7. Click Finish.
Note
The Finish button is available only when values have been provided for
all mandatory attributes.
The secondary business object is pasted on the primary business object through the
selected paste relation business object.
Note
You can either choose EditPaste or drag the secondary business objects to
the primary business object to associate the secondary and primary business
objects through the default paste relation of the primary business object.
You can perform the same actions in the My Navigator, CM Viewer, and
Details panes of the Structure Manager.
You must have write access to modify object properties. If you do not
have access to one or more of the selected objects, an error message is
displayed.
3-16
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
When using the box to enter string values, you can click Cancel Changes to
revert to the last submitted value at any time prior to submitting the changes.
5. Click Submit Changes or press the Enter key.
The modifications are reflected in the table but are not updated in the database
until you click Apply or OK.
Delete a relation
1. Open My Teamcenter.
2. Select the secondary object that has a relation with a primary business object.
3. Right-click the secondary object and choose Cut, choose EditCut or click
cut the relation between the primary and secondary objects.
to
11. Type the name of the relation business object and click
or scroll through the
tree structure and select the relation business object. Relation business objects
appear as a subclass of ImanRelation. Close the dialog box after selection.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
3-17
Chapter 3
The POM schema in tree format appears in the Class Attribute Selection dialog
box.
12. In the Class Attribute Selection dialog box, select the referencing object. For
example, select primary_object by double-clicking the node.
Note
You can also select the secondary object as the referencing object.
13. The referencing object, in this case, primary_object, and class, Newrelation,
appear in the Attribute Selection area.
14. Select the attributes of the referencing object on which you want to build query
clauses.
The attribute appears in the Search Criteria table.
Note
15. In the Attribute Selection section, select the other referencing object. In this
case, select secondary_object in the Attribute Selection section.
The Class Selection dialog box appears.
Note
If you selected primary object in step 12, select the secondary object in
this step. If you selected secondary object in step 12, select the primary
object in this step.
16. Select the class and click OK. For example, select Item.
17. To include other attributes of a relation, select the attributes in the Attribute
Selection section.
The attribute appears in the Search Criteria table.
18. Click the Create button to create the query.
The query is added to the Saved Queries tree of the Query Builder pane and is
available in the Select a Query list in My Teamcenter.
For more information about using search in the rich client, see the Rich Client
Interface Guide.
You must first use Query Builder to create queries for properties on relations.
1. Open My Teamcenter.
2. Locate the quick search input field, execute button, and menu
at the top of the navigation pane.
3. Click the menu button
3-18
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
3-19
Chapter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-4
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
Object-based
protection
Note
Rules and ACLs do not control the creation of objects. They only determine
what operations can be performed on existing objects. An administrator
controls which objects a user can create using the Command Suppression
application, which suppresses the display of menus and commands. An
administrator can also use the Business Modeler IDE to create display rules
that hide specific types when creating new objects using the FileNew
menus.
For more information about creating business object display rules, see
the Business Modeler IDE Guide.
You can classify data to restrict object access based on intellectual property and
international distribution requirements.
For information about using classification functionality, see the Classification Guide.
Teamcenter provides mechanisms for rules-based and object-based protection, and
for authorized data access (ADA) for intellectual property (IP) and international
traffic in arms regulation (ITAR).
For more information about functionality for ADA and ITAR support, see the
Security Administration Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
4-1
Chapter 4
Rules-based protection
Rules provide security for your Teamcenter data by:
Granting privileges to the data according to the users IDs and their session
context (the group and role they used to log on).
Note
Rules do not control the creation of objects. They only determine what
operations can be performed on existing objects.
A condition.
The condition and value identify the set of objects to which the rule applies; the ACL
defines the privileges granted to users (accessors).
User actions against objects cause the rule tree to be evaluated to dynamically build
an access control list for the object. The ACL controls permissions for the object and
determines who (accessors) can do what (actions) to the object.
Object-based protection
Object-based protection uses access control lists (ACLs) to create exceptions to
rules-based protection on an object-by-object basis.
Object ACLs are most useful when you need to:
4-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
ACLs do not control the creation of objects. They only determine what
operations can be performed on existing objects.
Each ACL contains a list of accessors and the privileges granted, denied,
or not set for each accessor.
Accessors
Controlling access to every object in the database on a user-by-user basis is
impractical. Therefore, Teamcenter uses the concept of accessors to grant or deny
privileges to clusters of users who share certain common traits (for example, they
perform the same function or work on the same project).
You work with access control lists (ACLs) to view, modify, add, or delete privileges
on an object.
You can grant or deny various types of access privileges on an object you own
if you have the proper permissions on that object.
Accessor precedence
It is important to understand that certain accessors take precedence over other
accessors. Generally, the more restrictive the accessor, the higher precedence it has
over other accessors. For example, world is the least restrictive of all accessors
but has the lowest precedence; owner is the most restrictive of all accessors but
has the highest precedence. If there is ever a conflict between these two accessors,
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
4-3
Chapter 4
Teamcenter enforces privileges granted or denied to the owner before those granted
or denied to the world. The following figure shows accessors in order of precedence.
Site ownership
All the previous information concerning accessors, accessor precedence, and
privileges applies to information and users sharing the same Teamcenter database.
However, your enterprise may have several databases or sites operating at several
different facilities. To share product information across multiple sites, one site must
be designated as the owner of each object. This is referred to as site ownership.
Site ownership is important if you want to transfer ownership of an object from
your site to another Teamcenter site when objects are exported. Site ownership
determines which site can modify an object after it has been exported.
4-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
You can also right-click the object and choose Access from the shortcut
menu or you can click
on the toolbar.
The Access dialog box appears, showing the privileges that the logged-on user
has to the selected object.
2. To view privileges assigned to your other roles and groups, select the role or
group from the lists in the Access dialog box.
The system updates the Access table to reflect the privileges of the selected
group and role.
3. To view the privileges of a different user, select the user, group, and role from the
lists in the Access dialog box.
The system updates the Access table to reflect the privileges of the selected
user, group and role.
For information about verifying the effect of access privileges, see the Access
Manager Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
4-5
Chapter 4
2. To view the privileges of a different user, select the user, group, and role from the
lists in the Access dialog box.
The Access dialog box shows the user smith has Read and Write privileges but
does not have Delete privileges to the 000017/A item.
The Extra Protection dialog box appears, showing the rules that apply to a
privilege being granted or denied.
4-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
on the
The system displays the Access dialog box, showing the access properties
assigned to the owner of the object.
Note
Master forms inherit access privileges from the parent item or item
revision. Therefore, changing access privileges to an item or item
revision affects the privileges on the master form.
The system displays a blank row at the bottom of the ACL list. You can click
this button more than once to add multiple entries.
4. Select the accessor type, as follows:
a. Double-click the blank box in the Type of Accessor
the list of predefined accessor types.
b.
PLM00046 I
column to display
Choose the accessor type that you want to add to the list.
My Teamcenter Guide
4-7
Chapter 4
or the
Note
to grant a privilege
To clear a privilege box, double-click in the box and choose the blank
entry.
Master forms inherit access privileges from the parent item or item
revision. Therefore, changing access privileges to an item or item
revision affects the privileges on the master form.
You can only change entries you have created or entries you have been
given permission to change by the Teamcenter administrator.
4. Grant or deny privileges for the type of accessor by double-clicking in the column
corresponding to the privilege you want to modify.
Select
Note
to grant a privilege.
To clear a privilege box, double-click in the box and choose the blank
entry from the list.
4-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
You must have read and write privileges to change object ownership.
The system displays the organization tree in the Change Owner/Group dialog
box.
7. Select the user in the tree to whom you want to grant ownership of the selected
objects. The following features in the Change Owner/Group dialog box can be
used to locate a user:
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
4-9
Chapter 4
Organization Tree
Find Groups
Find Roles
Find Users
Reload
Organization Tree
The Owner box in the table is updated with the new user; however, the change is
not yet updated in the database.
8. Click Apply to update the owner column in the Common modifiable properties
dialog box and retain the dialog, or click OK to update the owner column and
exit the dialog box.
9. Perform the appropriate action:
Click Save and Check-In to commit the changes to the database check in
the objects.
Click Save to commit the changes to the database and keep the objects
checked out.
3. To change ownership of only the object displayed in the dialog box (no
attachments or components), go to step 5.
4. (Optional) Change the ownership of component objects related to the selected
object, as follows:
4-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the
Explore dialog box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which
related objects are included.
b.
By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
4-11
Chapter 4
7. Save the information in the database or cancel the change ownership operation.
Click OK to assign ownership to the new user and close the dialog box.
The
symbol in the right margin of the dialog box (across from the
selected object) indicates that the change ownership process was successfully
completed. If an error occurs during the ownership change process, the error
is displayed for that object. You can double-click the icon to display
icon
details about the error.
4-12
Click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing ownership of the
objects.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-21
5-22
5-23
5-23
5-23
5-24
5-24
5-25
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-29
5-29
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-31
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
Items are structures that are generally used to represent a product, part, or
component.
Item revisions are data objects used to manage changes (revisions) to items.
The Item type is the parent type for many objects, including document, part, and
design types.
A part is a business object in the product structure. Each part may have one or
more CAD designs associated with it. The part is managed by the companys
part releasing system; it is typically revised and releases separately from the
associated design. A part may have one or more business owners.
A design is a CAD design solution that implements a business part. Each part
may be implemented by one or more CAD designs. Likewise, a CAD design may
implement more than one part. Certain parts do not require a design solution,
for example, paint and glue. A design may have one or more business owners.
Note
Anyone who manages parts and designs separately must align the
CAD designs and the BOM at appropriate times, using the techniques
described in Aligning CAD designs and parts.
Items can contain other data objects including other items and folders. You can
group and organize product information for each product, part, or component. An
item always contains the same data objects, regardless of which users workspace
displays the item.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-1
Chapter 5
Item
Collects data that is globally applicable to all revisions of the item.
ItemRevision
Collects data that is applicable to a single revision of the item.
5-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
The item types displayed in this dialog box are controlled by your
administrator. You may be unable to create item types that are visible
to you in your workspace.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-3
Chapter 5
b.
c.
Note
The Name and Description boxes may contain initial values determined
by property rules implemented at your site. You can replace such values,
but you cannot specify a null value by clearing the box. If you clear the
box, the initial value is reapplied to the property when you save the
new item.
At this point, you have provided all of the information necessary to define the
item.
6. (Optional) Expand the Additional Item Information and Item Revision
Information sections and define custom attributes, as implemented at your site.
5-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
7. Click Next to move to the next step and further define the item, or click Finish to
create the item immediately.
8. (Optional) Provide additional information as needed in your environment.
For example, if the Define Workflow Information pane is available, you can
provide workflow information by selecting a process template list and a process
assignment list.
9.
Click Finish.
Note
Note
To create an alternate or alias identifier for the new item, select the item
and choose FileNewID to display the New ID dialog box.
If an administrator specifies Item, Folder, or Form as values for the
TC_Enable_legacy_create preference, the legacy dialog boxes for creating
those objects are displayed. The legacy dialog boxes for creating Item,
Folder, or Form objects let you specify identifiers during creation of the
objects.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-5
Chapter 5
Business objects
Business objects are the fundamental objects that model business data.
Business objects were formerly known as types in Engineering Process
Management.
Tip
You can create an instance of any business object in the rich client by using the
FileNewOther menu.
All available business objects are listed in this menu, including custom business
objects created using the Business Modeler IDE.
For information about working with business objects, see the Business Modeler
IDE Guide.
The location of the Add New button varies based on the object you select.
Expand the Complete List object to view all available business objects.
4. Click Next.
5. Provide required information and click Next to populate any other associated
fields as needed.
6. Click Finish to create the new business object, or click Cancel to exit without
creating the new business object.
5-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
For example, when you add a new item revision to an item, the new item revision is
automatically defined as a revision relation.
The automatically defined relation types are:
Revision
Alternate ID
TC_validation
If validation process is enabled at your site, this relation is established between
the item revision and the validation_master form.
IMAN_Drawing
Specifies the relationship between an NX part and a drawing dataset.
Note
Relation type
Description
Specification
relations
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-7
Chapter 5
Relation type
Description
Requirement
relations
Attaches relations
Note
5-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Relation type
Description
Manifestation
relations
Reference relations
Alias relations
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-9
Chapter 5
order is applied to each rule condition, rather than to the entire rule. Ascending and
descending ordering can also be applied when all revisions are displayed.
Item revisions that do not match the filtering criteria are stored in the More folder
under the item.
Click the More folder to display the list of item revisions. You can select
an item revision from the list and the system opens it in a separate tab in
the My Teamcenter window.
Note
Each item type has its own display rule. The display rule is for the
selected item type only, and are not inherited by child types.
Click Remove () to remove a selected row from the table, or click Clear
to clear all rows from the table.
8. Select an option from the Rule list, either Working, In-Process, Release Status,
or Configured by.
Tip
5-10
To access the Rule list, double-click the box in the Rule column for the
applicable row.
Working
In-Process
Release Status
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Configured by
The Condition list includes all revision rules and release statuses
employed at your site, for the selected rule.
10. (Optional) Enter an integer in the Limit box, representing the number of
matching item revisions to display.
Note
An integer greater than one is not valid for some rules and conditions. In
that case, you cannot change the value in the Limit box.
11. (Optional) Use the up-arrow and down-arrow buttons to set the precedence of
the display rules in the table.
12. Click OK to create the display rule and exit the dialog box or click Apply to
create the display rule and retain the dialog box.
Status
000509/A
000509/B
000509/C
000509/D
000509/E
000509/F
In-Process
000509/G
Working
000509/H
Working
Without applying display rules, all of these revisions appear under the item in the
My Teamcenter tree display.
The image shows the rules used to display (in ascending order) only the latest
released item revision with status equal to Pending, all item revisions with status
equal to Released, and the latest Working revision in the My Teamcenter tree
for the Item item type.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-11
Chapter 5
Revision
Status
000509/C
000509/D
000509/E
000509/H
Working
The remaining revisions shown in Display rules example with equal to status are
placed in the More folder under item 000509.
5-12
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
When the rules in the Display rules example with not equal to status image are
applied, the system displays the revisions shown in the following table.
Revision
Status
000509/E
000509/D
000509/H
Working
000509/G
Working
The remaining revisions shown in Display rules example with not equal to status are
placed in the More folder under item 000509.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-13
Chapter 5
Note
To remove the revision rule, you can specify None as the preference
value.
4. Click New.
5. Use the same name as the site preference and select the scope, and provide the
desired revision rule.
6. Click Create.
There are now two preferences for the saved query, one governing the site and
another for the selected scope applicable to the group or user that created the new
preference.
The tri-pane window displays the Item tree (upper-left) and Item Revision tree
(lower-left), as well as the standard panes and views (right).
When you open an item, the item and all its related item revisions are displayed
in the Item tree, and the latest item revision is displayed in the Item Revision
tree.
When you open an item revision, the associated item and all related item
revisions are displayed in the Item tree, and the item revision that you opened is
displayed in the Item Revision tree.
5-14
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
The item revision display can be filtered by revision rules and by released, in-process,
or working revision status.
To filter the item revision display in My Teamcenter:
1. Select an item or item revision in the My Teamcenter tree.
2. Choose FileOpen.
3. Select the item or an item revision from the tree in the upper-left or lower-left
pane in the tri-pane window.
4. Click Revision selection
5. Select the filter to be applied to the display list using the Released, In-Process,
or Working buttons, or select a revision rule from the Revision Rule list.
The item revisions matching the filtering criteria are displayed in the dialog box,
arranged from latest to earliest revision.
6. Select an object in the Revision selection list to display it in the Item Revision
pane.
For more information about revision rules, see Getting Started with Product
Structure.
Defining attached data for item revisions created from item revisions
When you create item revisions using the Save As and Revise menu commands,
you can copy objects related to the original item revision forward to the new item
revision, as follows:
You can copy the object references from one item or item revision to another.
You can copy objects from one item or item revision to another as new objects
rather than as references to objects.
Objects that can be copied as new objects include:
PLM00046 I
Datasets
Forms
Folders
Item revisions
My Teamcenter Guide
5-15
Chapter 5
Item revision masters and BOM view revisions cannot be copied as references.
Deep copy rules determine which related objects are copied when a specific
item revision type is used as the basis for a new revision. If these rules are
implemented at your site, it is possible that you cannot select or deselect objects
to be copied forward, depending on how the rules are implemented.
Your administrator can also implement rules to copy secondary datasets to a new
revision when the primary dataset is copied forward.
Secondary datasets are those related to a particular dataset type by a
specific relation type.
Note
The left side of the form displays the Source tree containing the objects
related to the selected item revision.
Note
The symbols to the right of the objects indicate the default copy
option for that object. The default copy options are derived from site
rules and may be overridden depending on site implementation.
The right side of the pane displays the Destination tree containing the
resulting item revision with the objects copied according to the default
copy option.
3. (Optional) To override the copy option for an object, click the button to the right
of the object and select a different copy option from the Copy Options menu.
Tip
If the button is disabled, you do not have permission to change the copy
option for that object.
5-16
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Copy as Object Creates a new object of the same type and relation to the
parent object. Objects created by this method are totally
independent of the parent object. Therefore, any changes to
the copied object are not reflected in the original object.
Copied objects appear in bold in the Destination tree and can
be renamed.
Copy as
Reference
Dont Copy
Relate to Latest Allows you to relate the selected object to the latest item
revision with an Is Represented By relation.
Revise and
Allows you to revise the selected object and relate the
Relate to Latest new object revision to the latest item revision with an Is
Represented By relation.
Note
c.
5. Click Next to assign the revision to a project or click Finish to create the new
item or item revision.
Note
For more information about copy options for related objects, see Defining
attached data for item revisions created from item revisions.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-17
Chapter 5
The Save As menu command creates new items from existing items or item revisions.
The copy options for the objects related to the item revision differ depending on
whether an item or item revision is selected as the basis for the new item.
When you use an item as the basis, most of the objects related to the selected
item revision are copied as references. The exceptions are the item revision
master and BOM view revision. These are copied as new objects.
Caution
If your administrator has set a deep copy rule for a specific item
revision type, you must select the item revision (rather than the
item) when using the Save As command.
When you use an item revision as the basis, you have the option to copy the
related objects as references, as new objects, or not to copy the selected objects.
Note
If your administrator has set a deep copy rule for an item revision type,
that rule does not affect associated classification objects in the legacy
Save As dialog box. For revising, copying, or with the Save As menu
command, the behavior for classification objects is controlled by the
ICS_ico_action_after_saveas preference setting.
You can copy the objects related to the selected item revision, with the
exception of the item revision master and BOM view revision objects, to
the new item revision as references.
1. Select an item in the tree or Details table to be the basis of the new item.
2. Choose FileSave As.
The system displays the Save Item As dialog box.
3. Click Assign to automatically generate the next available item ID and revision,
or manually enter an item and revision ID.
Note
The unit of measure and item type are carried over from the original
item and cannot be modified.
5. (Optional) Click Next to display the Define Attached Objects page, which lets
you define how attached objects are copied and related to the new item revision.
For each attached object, click the Copy Option value and select the appropriate
option from the list.
5-18
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
The objects related to the selected item revision, with the exception of
the item revision master and BOM view revision objects, are copied to
the new item revision as references.
6. (Optional) Click Next to display the Related Objects information page, where
you can provide information such as project identifiers, user data, and serial
numbers.
7. Click Finish to create the copy.
The new item appears in your Newstuff folder.
Note
To create additional identifiers and specify display options for the newly
created item, select it and choose FileNewID.
If an administrator specifies true as a value for the
TC_Enable_LegacySaveAs preference, the legacy dialog boxes
for creating objects are displayed. The legacy dialog boxes let you specify
identifiers during creation of the objects.
You can use the Define Attached Data option to selectively choose whether
to copy objects related to the item revision as references, new objects, or
not copy the related objects.
1. Select an item revision in the tree or Details table to be the basis of the new
item and item revision.
2. Choose FileSave As.
The system displays the Save ItemRevision As dialog box.
3. Enter the revision identifier or click Assign to automatically generate the
revision value.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-19
Chapter 5
Note
The objects related to the selected item revision, with the exception of
the item revision master and BOM view revision objects, are copied to
the new item revision as references.
The objects related to the selected item revision, with the exception of
the item revision master and BOM view revision objects, are copied to
the new item revision as references.
The objects related to the source item revision are copied to the new item
revision using the default copy option defined for the related object type.
To select a different copy option for the applicable related objects, click
the Define Attached Data link in the left pane of the Save As dialog box.
5-20
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
To create additional identifiers and specify display options for the newly
created item revision, select it and choose FileNewID.
If an administrator specifies true as a value for the
TC_Enable_LegacySaveAs preference, the legacy dialog boxes
for creating objects are displayed. The legacy dialog boxes let you specify
identifiers during creation of the objects.
Mandatory steps required to create a new item revision are indicated by a red
asterisk. Once the mandatory steps are performed, the new revision is created. You
can then continue through the remaining steps in order, select individual steps from
the list, or exit the wizard. It is not necessary to work through the steps sequentially,
nor is it necessary to complete all of the steps.
Steps in the Revise dialog box:
Enter Item Information
Enter Additional Item Revision Information
Enter Identifier Basic Information
Enter Additional ID information
Enter Additional Rev information
Define Attached Data
Assign to Projects
Define Options
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-21
Chapter 5
Mandatory steps required to create a new revision are indicated by a red triangle.
Once the mandatory steps are performed, you can continue through the remaining
steps in order, select individual steps from the list, or exit the wizard.
You do not have to work through the steps sequentially, nor is it necessary to
complete all of the steps.
If mandatory item revision master attributes are defined for the item business
object, values must be entered before the system can create the item.
The Name and Description boxes may contain an initial value determined by
property rules implemented at your site. You can replace this value, but you
cannot specify a null value by clearing the box. If you clear the box, the initial
value is reapplied to the property when you save the new item revision.
Note
2. Choose FileRevise.
The system displays the Revise dialog box.
3. Enter the revision identifier or click Assign to automatically generate the
revision identifier. The Assign button is only available if naming rules and
automatic generation have been implemented for the selected object type.
Tip
It may be necessary to resize the dialog box to view the Assign button.
The unit of measure is carried over from the original item and cannot
be modified.
At this point, you have provided all of the information necessary to create the
item revision.
5. Click Next to move to the next step and further define the item revision or click
Finish to create the item revision immediately.
Tip
5-22
My Teamcenter Guide
The item revision is not created until you click Finish. If mandatory item
revision master attributes are defined for the item type, you must click
Next and enter attribute information before you can click Finish.
PLM00046 I
Note
See also:
Define the open, display, and checkout options for a new object
Use this procedure to add information stored on the item master and item
revision master form for attributes relevant to the object type.
1. Click the Enter Additional Item Information or Enter Additional Item Revision
Information link in the left pane of the dialog box.
Note
The system displays the input boxes in the right pane of the dialog box.
Mandatory attributes are indicated by a red asterisk in the upper-right corner of
the box.
2. Fill in the attribute information as needed or required.
3. Click Next to continue to the next step or click Finish to create the item or item
revision immediately.
Attach files and define workflow information
Depending on choices made by the administrator for the IRDC, revisions controlled
by IRDC may require the following input during creation:
Note
You can see whether a revision is under IRDC control by adding the Item
Revision Definition Configured? column to the Details table.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-23
Chapter 5
The Select Context options are derived from rules set by your
administrator.
Only identifier types that are valid for the selected context appear in
the list.
4. Enter an item ID, revision, and name for the alternate ID, or click Assign to
automatically generate the item ID and revision identifiers.
Tip
It may be necessary to resize the dialog box to view the Assign button.
Note
5. Click Next to move to the next step and further define the item or click Finish to
create the item or item revision immediately.
For more information about alternate identifiers, see Overview of alternate and
alias identifiers.
Specify additional attribute information for alternate IDs
1. Click the Enter Additional ID Information or Enter Additional Rev Information
link in the left pane of the dialog box.
The system displays input boxes in the right pane of the dialog box. Mandatory
attributes are indicated by a red asterisk in the upper-right corner of the box.
2. Fill in the attribute values as needed or required.
3. To further define the item, click Next or click Finish to create the new item
or item revision.
Note
This feature is available only if attributes have been defined for the selected
alternate ID type.
You can assign items, item revisions, and engineering change objects to a
project during the item creation process. All other objects must be assigned
after they are created.
1. Click the Assign to Projects link in the left pane of the dialog box.
The system displays the list of projects to which items can be assigned.
2. Select one or more projects from the Projects for Selection list.
3. Click the right-arrow button to move the projects to the Selected Projects list.
5-24
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
4. Click Next to move to the next step and further define the item, or click Finish to
create the item or item revision immediately.
Tip
Once an object is created, you can add it to other projects using the
ToolsProjectAssign menu command.
Note
You can assign objects to projects only if you are a privileged project team
member.
The Owning Project box, which is read-only, displays your current project.
This becomes the owning project for the item. To set your current project,
choose EditUser Settings and select a project from the Project list.
For more information about project team members, see Project
administrators and team members.
For more information about owning project functionality, see Creating
associations using Owning Project functionality.
Define the open, display, and checkout options for a new object
1. Click the Define Options link in the left pane of the dialog box.
The system displays the open, display, and checkout options.
2. Select Show as new root to open the item in a component view when it is created.
3. If you created an alternate identifier for the item, you can use the alternate
identifier as the default display object. Select Use item identifier as default
display and Use revision identifier as default display to set the alternate
identifier as the default display object.
4. Select Check Out Item Revision on Create to put a checkout lock on the
associated item revision when the item is created.
Tip
To remove the checkout lock from the item revision after the item is
created, select the item revision object and choose ToolsCheckInOut.
You can either check in the item revision or cancel the checkout.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-25
Chapter 5
You can use the Save As menu command to create a copy of an item revision and
its component objects (as defined using deep copy rules), but baselines provide the
advantage of capturing product data without stopping work or creating a new,
unnecessary, revision of the item. Additionally, baselines can capture an entire
assembly structure.
Baselines of configured product structures must be created using Structure Manager.
For more information, see Getting Started with Product Structure.
Baselines are related to the item revision from which they were created using an
IMAN_baseline relationship. The component objects and attachments are related
to the baseline via standard object relationships, such as IMAN_specification and
IMAN_requirement.
When you create a baseline, any alternate identifiers associated with the
original item revisions are also created for the new item revisions if a
baseline pattern is defined for the alternate ID type. If a pattern is not
defined, alternate IDs are not baselined.
The baseline revision ID and job name for the new baseline are generated
automatically, according to rules defined for your site, and cannot be
modified.
The description matches that of the base item revision and can be modified.
5-26
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
You can enter an alphanumeric string that represents the baseline label.
Teamcenter uses the label you enter as the name of the baseline folder.
Note
Select Dry Run Creation and click Apply to validate the baseline before
it is created.
The system displays a report of the proposed baseline structure that can be
printed using standard Teamcenter print features.
Note
Hide baselines
1. Choose EditOptions.
The Options dialog box appears.
2. Select Item.
3. Click the Display tab.
4. Select the Show displayable revisions only check box.
The Select Revision Relation dialog box appears.
5. Select Displayable Revisions and click OK.
6. Specify the order and rule for revisions display.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-27
Chapter 5
For example, when the released status on baseline item revisions is Pending,
you display the latest baseline revisions by setting the rule, Released Status,
equal to the condition, Pending, and set the limit to the maximum number of
baselines you want to display.
For more information about how to set an item revision display rule, see Set
an item revision display rule.
7. Select Descending as the display order.
8. Click OK.
The hierarchy tree pane displays the latest baselines up to the limit set.
If you click Save, then Cancel Check-Out, the changes are reverted and
the checkout status for the object is cancelled.
If you click Save, this does not check in the object. You must click
Check-In to complete the change.
5-28
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
An item can be deleted along with its entire structure (all of its related child
items and item revisions).
Items and item revisions can also be deleted individually, along with their
related components such as forms and datasets.
Delete an item
1. Select the item in the tree and click Delete on the toolbar or choose EditDelete.
The system displays a confirmation message in the Delete dialog box.
2. (Optional) Click the Explore Selected Component(s) button
components to delete.
to choose which
For information about how to delete selected components, see Delete an item
and selected components.
3. (Optional) Click the Delete item and all child items below it button
the item and all components in the item structure.
to delete
For information about how to delete an item and all child items below it, see
Delete an item and all of its child components.
4. Click Yes to delete the item and related revisions and components, or click No to
cancel the delete operation.
When the check box is cleared, only the latest sequence of the item revision
is removed by the delete operation.
When the check box is selected, all sequences of the item revision are deleted
by the delete operation.
to choose which
For information about how to delete selected components, see Delete an item
and selected components.
4. Click Yes to delete the item revision, sequences, and related components or
click No to cancel the delete operation.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-29
Chapter 5
By individual selection
a. Double-click the top-level object to expand the tree and view the object
components.
b.
c.
Expand the dialog box to view the entire name of the type and
relation options.
Click Update the selection in the tree based on rules to update the
selections in the tree.
Note
Rules can be removed from the table by selecting the row and
clicking Remove selected rules.
5-30
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
4. Click OK to accept the related objects and return to the original operation.
5. Click Yes to delete the item and selected components or click No to cancel the
delete operation.
To maintain referential integrity, the item and its revisions cannot be referenced
by any other occurrences outside the structure. However, they can be referenced
by any view of any revision of any item in the structure.
Neither the item nor any of its revisions can be checked out.
The system builds a representation of the structure and analyzes the components
to determine if they are candidates for deletion.
Note
This process can take a significant amount of time depending on the size
of the structure. You can stop the process by clicking Abort.
When the process is complete, the Delete Below dialog box appears.
The tree in the left pane displays the item/item revision structure and
related components. Items and item revisions are preselected for deletion.
By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-31
Chapter 5
The right pane of the dialog box lists type and relation combinations that
can be used to select components, as defined by your preference settings.
Both the Type and Relation lists include the Any option, which allows you to
select all instances of a specific object type, regardless of relation, or to select
all instances of a specific relation, regardless of object type.
Apply rule filters, as follows:
a. Click Add a Rule (+) to add a rule to the table.
b.
c.
Expand the dialog box to view the entire name of the type and
relation options.
Click Update the selection in the tree based on rules to update the
selections in the tree.
Note
Rules can be removed from the table by selecting the row and
clicking Remove selected rules.
4. Click Yes to delete the item and selected components or click No to cancel the
delete operation.
5-32
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
3. For more information about the types of operations you can perform, see the
Change Manager Guide.
4. In the appropriate boxes of the Mass Update wizard, search for the parts to be
included in the mass update.
Target
The part on which to base the change. The target part is used to identify the
assemblies that are impacted by the mass update.
Replacement/Add
The part to be replaced or added to the target part, depending on the
operation selected for the mass update. Defining a replacement part is not
required if you are removing a part or performing a manual update.
Change object
The change object in which to store the parts, the requested updates, and the
results of the mass updates.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-33
Chapter 5
Select the Add to Newstuff folder to ensure you have an update history.
You can use Audit Manager to view who performed the operation.
6. Click Next.
7. In the Select column of the Select the impacted Parts to update dialog
box, select the impacted assemblies you want to update. You can only select
assemblies to which you have write permission.
Tip
There are many reasons why you cannot edit an assembly, including
not having write access to it, the assembly does not belong to you, or
the mass update operation does not perform that type of replacement
or substitution (for example, the part already has an alternate
substitute or it is the preferred substitute).
Review the operations for any limitations on substitutes.
5-34
My Teamcenter Guide
To remove all table keyword filters in the Where Target is used text
box, click Erase.
PLM00046 I
To select all assemblies, click Select All and, to clear the selection of
all assemblies, click Deselect All.
8. Click Next.
The Review the Mass Update and Execute, Save or Cancel page appears.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
5-35
Chapter 5
5-36
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
When you render an item, you create a derived dataset from a source
dataset. The render action is initiated from a checkin or from a workflow
task. Such derived datasets are typically used when content must be
provided outside the authoring organization and the ability to make
changes to the original content must be restricted.
For more information about rendering items, see Getting Started with
Document Management.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
6-1
Chapter 6
The Dataset object represents an actual data file on the operating system or
in Teamcenter. Datasets are typically authored content of some sort, such as
Microsoft Office files or CAD data files.
You can digitally sign a PDF file stored as a dataset named reference file with
Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader.
New style sheets let you configure create dialog boxes and summary display
for Document objects.
The Digital Sign Dataset ACL rule grants the owning user and owning group
digital signing privileges for the dataset object.
Note
In the Adobe Reader, the PDF file must have Enable Usage Rights
for Digitally Sign enabled.
6-2
You can use create style sheets provided for Document objects to customize the
New Business Object wizard in the rich client and thin client to streamline
the document creation process.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Two user interface dialog boxes added to the New Business Object wizard support:
A system stamp can include the user name, the date and time, and other specified
business item attributes. You can also define optional additional user stamps,
which can be appended to the system stamp, to select when printing documents.
The stamp content and position is specified in a MetaDataStamp (MDS) file.
System stamps can be placed on the first page or all pages of the output.
You can attach local files and submit item revisions to a workflow during the
creation of the item revision objects.
Files you attach during creation replace the template files.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
6-3
Chapter 6
Template files are checked out and downloaded to the appropriate directories
only when no files are attached during creation of the item revision and
when you select the Check-Out Item Revision on Create check box to check
out the item revision at creation.
You can check out item revision objects with IRDC configured, and you can
download the attached source dataset files to local specified directories. The
relation between the checked-out item revision and the derived visualization
datasets is deleted.
Note
If you select only the dataset attached to the item revision to check
out, the download dialog box is not displayed and the associated
files cannot be downloaded.
When you check in item revision objects governed by IRDC, the checkin
process:
Uploads local files that have been downloaded through checkout.
Checks in the datasets.
If the search mode is specified in the IRDC, the system searches the users
local system to get the derived visualization files for checkin.
When revising item revision objects controlled by IRDC that have Check-Out
Item Revision on Create enabled, you can download the attached source
dataset files to local specified directories.
When you cancel checkout of item revision objects with IRDC, the downloaded
local files are deleted.
When you delete item revision objects with IRDC, if the Delete Files setting in
the IRDC object is set to false, the attached dataset of the item revisions are
not deleted.
Note
6-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Creating documents
Depending on how document management is implemented at your site, you can
create documents with or without item revision definition control (IRDC) objects that
specify templates and behaviors for specific document types.
Style sheets are provided for create dialog boxes and summary display for
Document objects.
Rendering documents
You render item revisions containing a datasets to translate the associated files an
alternate formats. For example, you can render an item revision with an attached
Microsoft Office dataset file to derive an Adobe PDF dataset file.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
6-5
Chapter 6
Note
6-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
An administrator can set the site preference using the rich client
EditOptions menu command.
Users can create user setting that takes precedence over the site setting.
For example, your Acrobat Markup Tool, PDF_Tool, and MSWord
specifies using Acrobat, then Reader, then MSWord, in that order.
Select one or more items, item revisions, or dataset objects, then choose
FileView/Markup to launch an external or embedded application to display the
related document and its associated markups.
Update the status field of a markup dataset with any text string. The value is
typically open, approve, or close.
For information about configuring view and markup functionality, see Getting
Started with Document Management.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
6-7
Chapter 6
Launch
Starts the application for the selected object.
X
Closes the dialog box without launching an application.
You must have appropriate privileges to use the FileView/Markup menu
command. For information about configuring view and markup functionality,
see Getting Started with Document Management.
Note
Adobe Acrobat
Adobe Reader
Note
The PDF file must have Enable Usage Rights for Digitally Sign enabled.
Use Adobe Acrobat or Adobe LiveCycle Reader Extensions to enable
usage rights for PDF files.
Digital signing is supported only for PDF datasets created in Teamcenter
10.1 or later.
The signed PDF file updates the PDF file stored in Teamcenter.
Note
The Digital Sign Dataset ACL rule grants the owning user and owning
group digital signing privileges for the dataset object.
World access users do not have digitally sign privileges.
For more information about digital signing, see Getting Started with Document
Management.
Siemens PLM Software recommends these methods for signing Teamcenter PDF
documents:
6-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
The initial configuration for digital signing of PDF files is set to not include
markups as follows:
User-specified stamps.
Note
Print Configuration
Displays available print configuration objects.
For information about creating print configurations, see the Business Modeler
IDE Guide.
Printer Name
Displays the name of the printer specified by the selected print configuration.
Number of Copies
Specifies the number of copies to print. This field requires a positive integer
between 1 and 99.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
6-9
Chapter 6
Collate
When two or more copies are printed, this checkbox specifies whether the printed
pages are collated.
User Stamp
Specifies text for a user stamp to be applied in addition to any existing system
stamp configuration.
For more information about creating system stamp configurations, see the
Business Modeler IDE Guide.
Paper Size
Lists available paper sizes as provided by the selected print configuration object.
Page Range
Specifies a range of pages to print.
Color
Specifies Color or Monochrome printing.
Print To Scale
Specifies the scaling factor, from 0.000001 to 100.0, applied to an image when its
printed.
With standard fit-to-page functionality, the image size is adjusted to fit the paper.
When Print To Scale is used, the image is adjusted to the scale value.
A value of 1.0 means the image prints at a 1:1 scale factor. For example, a
square image that measures 5 inches on each side is printed 5 inches per
side on the paper, regardless of the paper size. If the paper size is smaller
than 5 inches, the image is cropped.
A value of 2.0 means the image prints at a 2:1 scale factor. In this case, a
square image that measures 5 inches on each side is printed as a 10 inch
image and cropped to fit the paper, if necessary.
A value of 0.5 reduces the printed image size, so the image that measures 5
inches on each side is printed at 2.5 inches per side.
Print Stamp
Provides a list to specify whether the print stamp applies to the first page, the
banner page, or all pages.
Orientation
Specifies the paper orientation of best fit, portrait or landscape.
o
Best Fit
The image is rotated 90 degrees, if necessary, so the long side of the image
matches the long side of the paper.
6-10
Portrait
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
No rotation is performed.
o
Landscape
By default, the image is rotated left 90 degrees.
Note
Banner Page
Specifies whether to print a page including the defined stamps and listing
additional data as specified by the vvcp setup. The Banner Page box that has
the following values: Off, Single, and All Files.
When you choose items, the system selects the latest item revision for
each item and performs the batch print operation.
After any of the following events, you must do an explicit checkin of the
item revision to generate thumbnails.
Item create
During item creation, attach an image file to the item.
For more information, see Create an item using the New Item dialog box.
Explicit checkin is not required as an automatic checkin occurs during item
creation.
Update thumbnails
Update Thumbnail functionality allows you to change the source dataset of the
thumbnail and remove thumbnails from the item revision.
You must perform an explicit checkout and checkin after this action.
For more information, see Update a thumbnail graphic.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
6-11
Chapter 6
Explicit checkin is not required as the item revision being associated already
has a thumbnail.
6-12
Click OK.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
Navigate from a vendor object to associated commercial parts and vendor parts.
Display vendor parts in product structures according to rules, with support for
BOM compare to view changes to vendor part relations.
To classify vendor management types, you must first add them to the
ICS_classifiable_types preference.
For more information about classifying objects, see the Classification
Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
7-1
Chapter 7
Note
After you freeze a commercial part, you cannot change the preferred status
for the vendor part.
For information about vendor management preferences, see the Preferences and
Environment Variables Reference.
7-2
My Teamcenter Guide
Ensure you relate the objects or the results may be unreliable. For example,
commercial part items are related to vendor part items, although they are
not shown in the Vendor Parts pane in Structure Manager.
PLM00046 I
Note
Vendor
Supplies one or more vendor parts with attributes for locations and contacts.
Business enterprises may maintain a list of approved vendors (approved vendor
list or AVL) outside of Teamcenter, for example, in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
CompanyLocation
Lets you record information for a particular site or facility, including the name
(required), Web site, address, region, location code, location type, and notes. A
company location can be related to any number of company contacts.
CompanyContact
Specifies an individual in a company and lets you record standard contact
information. First name and last name values are required.
VendorPart
Acts as a vendor representation of a part.
A vendor part:
o
Has a vendor part name assigned by the vendor or assumes the companys
name for the part.
Vendor parts can be qualified with a status, for example, preferred, backup,
approved, or obsolete. This allows your company to always use the best source of
vendor parts. It also allows you to grade the overall product BOM.
For more information about product structure, see Getting Started with Product
Structure.
Note
PLM00046 I
CommercialPart
My Teamcenter Guide
7-3
Chapter 7
BidPackage
Contains package line items you supply to vendors who submit quotes. Bid
packages can be assigned to selected projects or programs.
BidPackageLineItem
Comprises a BOM line representing a part or assembly with associated context
rules, if any.
Quote
Contains the vendors response to a bid package line item. The vendor offers
(attaches) vendor parts that satisfy each line item in the bid package.
Note
Distributor
Resells, but does not make, parts.
Supplier
Makes parts to order for the OEM.
1. In this context, your company is referred to as the original equipment manufacturer (OEM).
7-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Manufacturer
Makes parts for the general market.
You can create the necessary role types for your business with the Organization
application.
For more information, see the Organization Guide.
Note
You can click Assign to automatically generate Part ID and Revision ID.
The default value for the revision master form Make or Buy attribute is
2 (Buy).
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
7-5
Chapter 7
4. Type or select a value for Vendor ID, type an optional value for Location, and
click Next.
To select a value for Vendor ID, click the Search button beside the Vendor ID box
to display the Open by Name dialog window.
Type either the name of the vendor or the vendor ID and click the Find button. If
duplicate vendors exist with the same vendor ID, the Item Resolution dialog box
appears allowing you to select the appropriate vendor.
5. Provide additional attribute values as needed, and click Finish to create the
vendor part object.
7-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
4.
5. Provide additional attribute values as needed and click Finish to create the
vendor object.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
7-7
Chapter 7
3. Type values for Bid Package ID, Revision ID, Name and an optional value for
Description and click Next or click Finish to create the bid package and bid
package revision object.
Note
1. In My Teamcenter, navigate to a bid package revision and select the Bid Package
revision object.
2. Choose ToolsVendor ManagementAdd Bid Package Line Item or use the
shortcut menu to choose Vendor ManagementAdd Bid Package Line Item.
3. Type values for the Name box and an optional value for the Description box.
4. Enter the Part/Assembly value to specify the commercial part to which the
line item refers.
5. Enter the Configuration Context value to specify the configuration and variant
rules for export.
6. Type a value in the Quantity box for the number of parts required.
7. Click OK to create the bid package line item.
Note
Modify bid package line items using the standard properties dialog.
Note
7-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Location Code
Location Type
Select a value from the menu for Location Type:
o
Street
City
State/Province
Postal Code
Country
Region
URL
Description
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
7-9
Chapter 7
To select a value for Vendor ID, click the Search button beside the Vendor ID box
to display the Open by Name dialog window.
Type either the name of the vendor or the vendor ID and click the Find button. If
duplicate vendors exist with the same vendor ID, the Item Resolution dialog box
appears allowing you to select the appropriate vendor.
5. Select a vendor location.
6. Provide additional attribute values as needed and click Finish to create the
vendor part object.
7-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
of
The system either verifies that the location is a child of the vendor that
is providing the vendor part or displays an error message.
2. Choose ViewProperties.
3. Click Check-Out and Edit.
4. Edit the properties of the location.
5. When the edits are complete, check in the object.
When a property is updated, it overwrites the object with the new value.
Delete a location
1. In My Teamcenter, expand the Locations folder under a vendor.
2. Select the location you want to delete.
3. Choose EditDelete.
This removes the location from the list of associated locations for the vendor from
the database.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
7-11
Chapter 7
2. Choose FileNewOther.
The system displays the New Business Object dialog box.
3. Select Company Contact from the list of business objects and click Next.
4. Type values for Title, First Name (required), Last Name (required), Suffix, Phone
(business/home/mobile), Fax, Pager, Email, and Description.
5. Click Finish to create a contact.
The system creates the contact object and associates it to the selected vendor or
company location using the ContactInCompany relation.
2. Choose ViewProperties.
3. Click Check-Out and Edit.
4. Edit the properties of the company contact.
5. When the edits are complete, check in the object.
2. Select a location.
3. Drag and drop the location onto the Locations pseudofolder
2. Select a location.
3. Drag and drop the location onto the Contacts pseudofolder
7-12
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Delete a contact
1. In My Teamcenter, expand the Contacts folder.
2. Select the contact you want to delete.
3. Choose EditCut.
This removes the contact from the list of associated contacts in the database.
Delete a vendor
1. In My Teamcenter, select the vendor you want to delete.
2. Choose EditCut.
If a vendor is deleted, the associated locations and contacts are also deleted.
PLM00046 I
to relate it to a
My Teamcenter Guide
7-13
Chapter 7
Note
If the part is not already classified, the system prompts you to classify it.
Select the particular class where you want to classify that object.
7-14
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8-6
8-7
8-7
8-8
8-8
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
You enable display of alternate and alias identifiers by using shown item relations.
Separator and context length associated with the identifiers can be configured.
For more information, see Define alias ID and alternate ID as a shown relation.
Note
In a default configuration, you can use the Search view to find items
by specifying the alternate identifier. To search based on Alternate
ID and Context criteria to find items that have been published to the
Object Directory Service (ODS), choose Change SearchSystem Defined
SearchesRemote. Also, your system administrator can add the identifier
and context to Item and Item Revision saved queries.
To search alternate identifier values in Structure Manager, use an Item or
Item Revision search. To display alternate identifier values in Structure
Manager, you must edit a preference to add the column to the BOM line
display table; an administrator can use the Business Modeler IDE to add
a title for the new column.
For information about making product structure searches, see the Structure
Manager Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
8-1
Chapter 8
Warning
The alias identifier feature (accessed from the Revise and New Item
dialog boxes or using the NewID command on the File menu)
is a replacement for the alias object feature accessed by choosing
FileNewAlias. These features must not be used together in the
same database.
The identifier attribute cannot be modified if any revision of the item has been
released.
If you want to use custom attributes for identifiers, your administrator must
create two new classes, one for the identifier and one for the identifier revision.
These new classes should be based on the identifier class.
For information about defining contexts, creating types, identifier classes and
defining identifier context rules, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide.
For more information about alternate identifier rule characteristics, see the Business
Modeler IDE Guide.
Alias identifiers
Alias identifiers store part numbers and other attribute information for similar
parts, and they can be associated with many items or item revisions.
Alias IDs let you store information about external entities.
For example, alias IDs can be used to do any of the following:
8-2
Store parts according to internal naming conventions and also according to the
naming conventions of other companies, such as suppliers.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Alternate identifiers
Alternate identifiers store information about part numbers and attributes of the
same part from different perspectives. They allow different user communities to
identify and display an item or item revision according to their own rules rather
than according to the rules of the user who created the object.
Assigning alternate identifiers to a part at different stages of development and
production allows you to maintain a history of the lifecycle of the part.
Both alias and alternate identifiers are created within a context. The context is used
to denote a specific organizational focus, such as a supplier or a department in your
organization. You can also use identifiers to store custom information, such as a
suppliers name and address or cost data.
Alternate identifiers have the following characteristics:
Once created, the context and owning item revision cannot be modified.
The identifier cannot be modified if any revision of the alternate has been
released.
The item alternate cannot be deleted if any of the revision alternates cannot be
deleted.
Alternate IDs let you define additional identifiers for an item that are then useful for
setting up appropriate display contexts. For example, the design department can
use item IDs, but other departments or other companies may have other IDs. A
single item can be assigned any number of IDs, each unique within its context and
controlled and assigned by its own naming rules.
The following example shows possible alternated IDs for an item:
MyItem123
123456789@dept01
K9999999999@company01
0000-9999999@company02
PLM00046 I
A user in department 01 can set the display context to see all items with their
dept01 number.
A manager that deals primarily with company 01 can set the context to show all
items with the company01 ID values.
My Teamcenter Guide
8-3
Chapter 8
The revision text box and the Assign button are not available when
you create an alias identifier. The Assign button is available when you
create alternate identifiers, but it is functional only when naming rules
and automatic generation are set for the identifier type and identifier
revision type.
8-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
14. (Optional) Select one or both of the Use item identifier as default display and
Use revision identifier as default display options to set the new identifier as the
default display for the item or item revision.
15. Click Finish.
The new identifier is created and displayed according to your display rules and
default settings.
Note
The new identifier may not yet be displayed under the appropriate item
or item revision.
For more information, see Define alias ID and alternate ID as a shown
relation.
Use the same procedure to display the identifier under the item revision
node.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
8-5
Chapter 8
If the property is not visible, click the More link in the lower-left corner
of the dialog box.
6. If necessary, click Check Out and Edit to enable the arrows for the Paste
command.
7. Click the arrow next to the value of the id_dispdefault property and choose
the Paste option.
8. Click Save and Check In.
The alternate ID is now the default display for the item or item revision and is
displayed according to your identifier display rule settings.
Display rules can be associated with multiple contexts. The selected contexts are
evaluated by the system in the order in which they appear in the Selected Contexts
list, from top to bottom. If an item or item revision alternate identifier exists that
corresponds to the first context in the list, that identifier is displayed in your
8-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
workspace. If none match the first context, the next context is evaluated and if an
alternate identifier exists, it is displayed. This continues until a context is found
that matches one of the alternate ID contexts defined for the item or item revision.
For more information about ID context rules, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide.
If the item or item revision does not have alternate identifiers corresponding to any
of the contexts in the display rule, the Use Default option, found on the Id Display
Rules dialog box, lets you specify that the default identifier specified for the item
or item revision should be displayed. If no default identifier is specified, the initial
identifier attribute of the item or item revision is displayed as specified by your
default display identifier settings.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
8-7
Chapter 8
The system displays the context, or contexts, in the Selected Contexts lists.
5. (Optional) Change the order of the contexts using the up-arrow and down-arrow
buttons.
The contexts in the Selected Contexts list are evaluated in order, from top to
bottom, to determine which identifier is displayed.
6. (Optional) Select the Use Default check box to display either the default or initial
identifier attributes for objects that do not fit any of the selected contexts.
7. Click OK.
The system displays the new rule in the Rule List pane.
8. To set this rule as your current display rule, select the rule and click Set Current.
The system displays a confirmation dialog box stating that the rule will be
changed and the currently displayed data will be affected by the new rule.
9. Click OK.
The system closes the confirmation dialog box.
10. Click Close to close the Id Display Rules dialog box.
This action is allowed only when there is a display rule currently set.
8-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
The dialog box closes and the rules are displayed in your rule list.
Modifying identifiers
You can use the Viewer tab or Properties dialog box to modify the properties of
alternate and alias identifier objects.
Once assigned, the context of the object cannot be modified. If any of the alternate
revision IDs are released, the alternate ID cannot be modified. In addition, you
cannot convert an alias identifier to an alternate identifier.
The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the
Explore dialog box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which
related objects are included.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
8-9
Chapter 8
b.
By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.
You cannot delete the last alternate revision ID of an alternate ID, you must
delete the entire alternate ID.
8-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
8-11
Chapter
Managing datasets
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-1
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-3
Creating datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a new dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create a new dataset by drag-and-drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating datasets or dataset revisions based on existing datasets
Create a dataset based on another dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-6
.
.
.
.
.
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9-11
9-11
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-15
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
Managing datasets
Managing datasets
Datasets manage data files created by other software applications. When you
double-click a dataset to open it, the system launches the software application
associated with the dataset instead of expanding a container.
When your administrator configures Teamcenter for your enterprise, other software
applications can be encapsulated. These application data files can then be managed
from inside a Teamcenter session. If your administrator has encapsulated other
software applications (Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, and so on), those icons also
appear in Teamcenter.
Your administrator can also configure Teamcenter document management
functionality to simplify interactions with datasets by configuring behaviors for
rendering, printing, and marking up documents, and for generating thumbnail
images.
For information about working with document management in Teamcenter, see
Getting Started with Document Management.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
9-1
Chapter 9
Managing datasets
You can use the Purge command on the Edit menu to completely and permanently
remove old versions of a dataset from the database. You can select whether to purge
all old versions or specific versions of a dataset. To purge a dataset, you must have
read, write, and delete privileges on the versions of the dataset that you want
to purge.
When you attempt to delete a UGALTREP dataset, the system displays the
following message:
UGALTREP is in use in a UG/Manager assembly, so may not be removed.
Note
9-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing datasets
Caution
Creating datasets
You can create a dataset using menu commands or by dragging a file from an
operating system file manager onto a Teamcenter folder, an item, or an item revision.
In addition to being able to select dataset type before you import files, you can also
select files to import before selecting a dataset type.
This applies to the New Dataset dialog box displayed by the FileNew Dataset menu
command, and to the Enter Attach Files Information pane displayed by FileNew
wizards, such as the New Item wizard.
When you select a dataset type, and then click the import button, only the files
that match the selected dataset type are displayed.
When you select Import first, only the dataset types that match the selected file
name extensions are available.
If you select a dataset type that contains more than one named reference that
matches the available file extensions, the Select Reference Type dialog box
is displayed.
PLM00046 I
To use the Shift key for multiple file selection, the site must implement the
com.teamcenter.rac.common.filesSelector extension.
My Teamcenter Guide
9-3
Chapter 9
Managing datasets
Note
Naming rules that control the format of the Dataset ID, Name, and Revision number
may be in effect at your site. These rules are managed by your administrator using
the Business Modeler IDE application.
For more information, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide.
A Microsoft Office dataset file created in Teamcenter is created as a plain
text file. The first time you save the file you are prompted to convert the
file to the standard format.
Note
You can create a new dataset from a file by using the Import option on
the New Dataset dialog box.
To have the Teamcenter rich client display custom datasets in the list of
available dataset types, an administrator must add Dataset to list of valid
values for the TYPE_DISPLAY_RULES_list_types_of_subclasses
preference.
3. Type a descriptive name (up to 128 ASCII characters) in the Name box.
This name is used as a label in the object area.
Tip
It is good practice to keep the names short so that you can see the entire
name in the My Teamcenter tree.
4. (Optional) Type a description (up to 240 ASCII characters) to help identify this
dataset in the Description box.
5. If required, assign a dataset ID by typing a unique identifier in the Dataset ID
box or click Assign to automatically generate the next available dataset ID.
Note
9-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing datasets
7. Select a dataset type from the Type bar by clicking the icon.
If the type names are truncated, click the arrow located in the upper-left corner
of the Type bar, and then select a type from the list.
The Type bar displays the dataset types that you use the most.
If you do not see the type you are looking for, click More to display all defined
dataset types.
Note
The dataset types displayed in this dialog box are controlled by your
administrator. Therefore, you may be unable to create dataset types that
are visible to you in your workspace.
8. Select the Tool Used option to edit the dataset file if more than one option
is available.
9. To select a file, click the
The type of file that you import must match the dataset type selected in
step 7.
11. Select Open on Create to launch the tool associated with the dataset and
immediately open the file upon creation.
12. Complete the procedure:
To close the dialog box without saving the information you entered, click
Cancel.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
9-5
Chapter 9
Managing datasets
Type a description (up to 240 ASCII characters) to help identify this dataset
in the Description box.
Change the values in the Dataset Type, Reference, and Tool Used boxes.
4. Click OK.
The system displays the new dataset object under the drop-target object.
9-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing datasets
You can also create a new dataset from a file by using the Import option
in the New Dataset dialog box.
Open a dataset using a tool other than the tool defined for the dataset
type
1. Select the dataset in the tree or Details table.
2. Choose FileOpen With.
The system displays the Open With dialog box.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
9-7
Chapter 9
Managing datasets
3. Select a file under the tool you want to use to open the dataset file. Expand the
Tool node in the tree to see the dataset files.
4. Click OK, Apply, or Cancel.
Open an NX dataset
1. Select the dataset or item revision with which the dataset is associated from the
tree or Details tabbed page.
2. Click Open in NX on the toolbar or choose FileOpen in NX.
The system launches NX and displays your data.
Deleting datasets
Selecting a data object and choosing Delete from the Edit menu completely and
permanently removes that object from the database. Once a data object is deleted, it
cannot be recovered. Therefore, you are always prompted to confirm that you really
want to delete the object. You must have read, write, and delete privileges on an
object that you want to delete.
This procedure purges all versions of a dataset with the exception of the
current version. The purge action cannot be reversed.
9-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing datasets
3. Click Yes to purge all other versions of the dataset or click No to cancel the
operation and close the dialog box.
Datasets are data objects that manage data files (operating system files) created
by other software applications. Each dataset can manage multiple operating
system files as separate named references.
Named references are Teamcenter objects that relate to a specific data file. In
other words, a named reference is a file attached to a dataset. For example, you
create and select a dataset in the rich client, right-click to display the shortcut
menu, and choose Named References. You can then click Upload to associate
files to the dataset object.
Note
When you upload a file in the rich client, you select the dataset type along with
the file that you want to upload.
The named reference includes:
o
Reference name
The reference type associated with the named reference.
PLM00046 I
A single dataset object can have one or more named references. To view the
named references of a dataset from the rich client, select the dataset and choose
ViewNamed References, or right-click and choose Named References.
A dataset type must have at least one named reference associated with it. A
named reference defines the file information that can be added to this dataset
type.
My Teamcenter Guide
9-9
Managing datasets
Chapter 9
dataset file from Teamcenter. A dataset type contains a list of tools that can
operate on the dataset. This list is known as the dataset references.
A tool action specifies Teamcenter activity for a dataset. Tool actions are defined
on the dataset type and usually at least the Open action is defined. When no
tool actions are defined for a dataset, an error message is displayed when you
try to open the dataset in Teamcenter.
Note
Administrator users can add named references using the import_file utility.
For information about the import_file utility, see the Utilities Reference.
9-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing datasets
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
9-11
Chapter 9
Managing datasets
6. In the Translation Arguments section, you add, modify, or delete Key and Value
arguments.
7. In the Priority and Time Properties section, you can set the following options:
a. Time
Choose the time for the translation to start.
Click the Admin Time and Date properties button
and Time dialog box.
In the Date and Time dialog box, type the translation start time and click OK.
9-12
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing datasets
b.
Priority
Choose the priority for the translation task.
c.
Repeating
Choose this option if you want to repeat the translation.
Note
The Repeating option does not appear by default. You must set
the ETS.Repeating_UI.<ProviderName>.<ServiceName>
preference to TRUE to display the repeating tasks functionality.
Note
Full geometry is loaded incrementally as you expand the model structure in the
assembly tree, or when you hold the Shift key and select in the viewing window.
For information about enabling the Simpgen translator in Teamcenter, see the
Dispatcher Server Translators Reference Guide.
The Simpgen translator lets you create JtSimplification datasets.
1. In My Teamcenter, select an item revision.
2. Choose TranslationTranslate.
3. In the Translation Selection dialog box, select the simpgen service, and then
click Next.
4. In the Translation Arguments section, configure the revision rule.
5. In the Priority and Time Properties section, specify the appropriate values for
translation time, priority, and translation repeating schedule options.
6. Click OK to start the translation.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
9-13
Chapter 9
Managing datasets
9-14
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing datasets
For complete details about translation services, see Getting Started with
Dispatcher (Translation Management).
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
9-15
Chapter 9
Managing datasets
Note
The my_pcb_folder folder and circuit item revision are sample names.
13. In the Select translator for dataset dialog box, in the Provider section, select
UGS.
14. In the Translator section, select a translator that can translate your native
CAD file.
15. Click OK to start the translation process.
16. (Optional) Choose TranslationRequest Administration Console to see the
progress of the various translation stages.
17. (Optional) In the Translation Request Administration dialog box, type an
asterisk in the Service section and then click Query.
Note
18. Select the desired gencad item and click Refresh. Close this dialog box when
the translation is finished.
Note
19. To display the new XFATF file, select the circuit node, right-click and choose
Refresh.
The XFATF item revision appears in the Demo folder.
9-16
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing datasets
20. If the CAD file in a PCBCircuit item contains multiple PCB designs (for example,
panelized circuits), after translation the child items of the PCBCircuit item are
created. Each child item contains translated version of an individual PCB design.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
9-17
Chapter
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 10-8
. 10-9
. 10-9
10-10
10-10
10-10
10-11
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
The Check-Out option locks an object in the database so that only you can
modify it.
The Check-In option releases the lock, allowing other users to access the object.
Only your administrator can circumvent the security that the checkout function
provides.
Explicit checkout occurs when you use a menu command or button to check out
an object. You must then choose to check in the object when you are finished
with your modifications.
For more information, see Explicit checkout.
Implicit checkout occurs when you double-click to open a dataset from the rich
client or click Edit beside a dataset file in the thin client. Implicit checkout only
occurs if the object is not already checked out. Checkin occurs automatically
when you close the document.
For more information, see Implicit checkout.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
10-1
Chapter 10
The following objects can be checked into and out of the database:
Folders
Datasets
Forms
Explicit checkout
When you check out an object by using the Check-In/Out commands on the Tools
menu, or when you use the Check-Out and Edit button in a view, you explicitly check
out the object from the database. Explicit checkout ensures exclusive modification
access to an object.
You define the checkout directory by choosing EditOptions and setting the General
Check-In/Check-Out options.
You can set the Export files on checkout option to YES to lock the dataset for
everyone, including the person who holds the checkout.
When a dataset is checked out during export, the named references are
downloaded to a local operating system directory and can be modified locally
outside of the Teamcenter environment.
When the dataset is checked into the database, any modifications to the named
reference files are automatically uploaded to the database.
Note
If your site has the TC_Auto_Checkout preference set to OFF, you must
use Export files on checkout to save modifications to a dataset named
reference. The downloaded named reference can be modified outside
Teamcenter. When modification is complete, the dataset must be checked in
through Teamcenter.
Implicit checkout
When you double-click a dataset object in Teamcenter, the system automatically
creates an implicit checkout to ensure that two processes are not allowed to
simultaneously update the dataset.
Implicit checkout differs from explicit checkout in the following ways:
10-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Implicit checkout is automatic and occurs when you open a dataset for
modification. When the modifications are completed, the dataset is automatically
checked back into the database.
Users included on notification lists are not notified when implicit checkout
takes place.
An implicit checkout in the Viewer view is released when you select a different
object while the Viewer view is active. The checkout lock is not released if you
only select another view such as the Summary or Details view.
Note
Explicit checkout occurs when you use a menu command or button to check
out an object.
Implicit checkout occurs when you open an object from Teamcenter, typically
by selecting the object when the Summary view or Viewer view is active,
by double-clicking a form object, or by displaying properties for a selected
object. Implicit checkout does not occur when the object is already checked
out or when multiple objects are selected.
PLM00046 I
When an object is checked in, the Properties dialog box displays OK, Apply, and
Cancel buttons, and you can make modifications in this dialog box.
o
Click Apply to automatically check out the object, save it, and check it in.
Click OK to automatically check out the object, save it, check in the object,
and close the dialog box.
When you already have the object checked out, the Properties dialog box displays
the Save, Check-In, Cancel Check-out, and Close buttons.
My Teamcenter Guide
10-3
Chapter 10
When an object is checked out by another user, the Properties dialog box displays
the Close button.
If you use this option to check out a replica item revision from a remote
site and add data to the item revision prior to checking it back in, the
system perceives the new data as being owned by the site that owns the
item revision rather than being owned by the local author.
2. Choose ToolsCheck-In/OutCheck-Out.
The system displays the Check-Out dialog box.
3. If you want to check out only those objects displayed in the dialog box (no
attachments or component objects), go to step 5.
4. (Optional) Check out component objects or attachments along with the selected
objects.
a. Click Explore Selected Component(s)
The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the
Explore dialog box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which
related objects are included.
b.
By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.
10-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Check in an object
1. Select one or more objects that are currently checked out or select a checked-out
part or assembly represented by a BOM line in Structure Manager.
The Check-In option unlocks objects in the database, including assemblies in
Structure Manager, that were previously checked out.
Note
If you use this option to check in a replica item revision and have
added data to the item revision prior to checking it back in, the system
perceives the new data as being owned by the site that owns the item
revision rather than being owned by the author at the local site.
For more information, see the Multi-Site Collaboration Guide.
2. Choose ToolsCheck-In/OutCheck-In.
The Check-In dialog box appears.
3. If you want to check in only those objects displayed in the dialog box (no
attachments or component objects), go to step 5.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
10-5
Chapter 10
The system displays the component structure of the selected object in the
Explore dialog box along with a pane for defining rules that determine which
related objects are included.
b.
By individual selection
Select the check box corresponding to the component in the tree.
10-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
You can double-click the error button to display details about the error.
The Details table CO- Checked Out column entry changes to blank.
Note
PLM00046 I
Site name and user ID of remote users who have checked the object out
of the database
My Teamcenter Guide
10-7
Chapter 10
You can add yourself to the notification list for any object; however, you
must have administrative privileges to add or remove other users from a
notification list.
Sequences
You use sequences if your business requires additional management of progress
within revisions.
10-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
When you create an item revision, an initial sequence, to which Teamcenter assigns
an initial sequence ID, is also created. This sequence becomes the active, or default,
sequence.
Checkout actions increment the sequence ID for the item revision, with the most
recent sequence ID becoming the default.
The default sequence is the only sequence you can check in and check out.
Attempting to check out a nondefault sequence results in an error.
Only one sequence can be active at any given time for an item revision.
Sequence accumulation
Teamcenter limits by object type the number of sequences stored in the database.
At checkin, the system automatically removes the oldest sequence when you reach
the limit.
Note
When you create a new item revision, such as when you revision A to revision
B, all sequences are removed from the new revision and the new revision starts
with the first sequence ID.
You can set immunity for sequences to prevent their automatic removal.
The system displays an error message if you attempt to exceed the established
limit. To add a new sequence after you reach the limit, you must remove at least
one sequence by using either the Delete or Purge actions.
For information about using search queries to retrieve sequences, see Query
for sequences.
For information about removing sequences, see Delete and purge sequences.
Sequence preferences
The following preferences affect sequence behavior:
PLM00046 I
TCDefaultKeepLimit
My Teamcenter Guide
10-9
Chapter 10
TCDefaultKeepLimitByType
Determines the number of sequences the system maintains for the specified
business object.
TCCheckoutReserveOnly
Specifies for business objects whether a restore copy is not created during
checkout.
Sequence ID display
The system displays the sequence ID appended to the item ID and revision,
separated from the item revision by a semicolon (;). The sequence ID is followed by a
hyphen () and the object name. For example, the sixth checkin for item revision
000186/A of part P_AX32 is displayed as follows:
000186/A;6P_AX32
By default, the system only displays the active sequence, but you can display all
sequences for an item using a search query.
For example, a query for All Sequences returns sequence information in the
following format:
000186/A;3P_AX32
000186/A;4P_AX32
000186/A;5P_AX32
000186/A;6P_AX32
For information about using search queries to retrieve sequences, see Query for
sequences.
All Sequences returns all previous sequences for objects that match the
specified criteria.
10-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
To delete the default sequence, select the default sequence and choose
EditDelete. In the Delete dialog box, you can select or clear the Delete All
Sequences check box. If this check box is not selected, only the latest sequence
is deleted and the previous sequence is the new default.
A purge command used when the latest sequence is selected removes all
previous sequences.
A purge used with a previous sequence selected removes only the selected
sequence, but only if it is not marked immune from purge.
For more information about making a sequence immune, see Set sequence
immunity.
For information about using search queries to retrieve sequences, see Query for
sequences.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
10-11
Chapter
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-13
11-13
11-14
11-14
11-14
11-17
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
Default options under the ToolsImport menu include From Briefcase, Objects,
From PLMXML, Remote, and Templates.
You can import objects in to the database from sites that are not part of a
Multi-Site Collaboration network.
Note
When sharing form data between multiple sites, ensure that the form
storage class is properly defined at the importing site and is compatible
with the form storage class at the exporting site.
For information about most import and export commands, see the Data Exchange
Guide. Additional references for specific types of data sharing are noted where
those types of data are described.
Briefcase provides an alternative method of sharing data with suppliers or other
unconnected Teamcenter sites. A Briefcase package file contains the selected object,
such as an assembly, and its related components and data, in an archive format.
The PDX export process packages Teamcenter data in a file format that is usable
by applications that support the PDX format. You can also import PDX packages
into Teamcenter and, if you have a configured a PDX tool in Teamcenter, open the
package into the tool.
You can import and export data that in PLM XML format. When you export objects
in PLM XML format, the transfer mode determines what data is exported. You can
also track your PLM XML exports using Application Interface mode.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
11-1
Chapter 11
For more information about transfer modes, see the PLM XML/TC XML Export
Import Administration Guide.
Note
While exporting workflow templates from a site using PLM XML, some of the
associated objects such as named ACLs, saved queries, and release statuses
do not get exported for security reasons. Therefore, when the exported file is
imported at another site, these associated objects are not imported/created.
Named ACLs must be manually created and synchronized between sites.
Saved query and release status objects can be exported/imported separately
using PLM XML, and this method should be used to synchronize these
objects between sites. During PLM XML import, if the process encounters
these object types, a warning message is written to the log file indicating
that these objects must be synchronized independently. The log file is named
plmxml_log_#.log and is located in the log directory.
You can import objects from other sites in to your database even if you do not
have a direct network connection to the site; however, you must have a directory
containing data exported from the other site. This directory must be the output of
an object export operation (as opposed to simple file export operation) using one
of the following object export methods:
Teamcenter export
STEP export
Object export allows you to export objects in Teamcenter format or STEP format.
When you export an object in Teamcenter or STEP format, you move all internal
data associated with that object. For example, if you export an item, you export
all its relations (for example, item revisions, BOM view revisions, item master,
and any exportable requirement, specification, manifestation or reference objects)
in one operation.
With Supplier Relationship Management (SRM), when an original equipment
manufacturer (OEM) sponsor needs to exchange data with a supplier who does not
have a Teamcenter installation, the sponsor can select items in My Teamcenter to
share with the supplier. The sponsors e-mail address is required, and the sponsor
can optionally type a reason for the export and can specify a transfer option set.
For information about configuring export to SRM, see the Data Exchange Guide.
For information about JT import and export, see the PLM XML/TC XML Export
Import Administration Guide.
For information about importing and exporting Systems Engineering structures, see
the Systems Engineering Guide.
Export an object
1. Select the objects to be exported.
2. Choose ToolsExportObjects.
The system displays the Export dialog box.
3. Click Teamcenter in the left pane of the dialog box.
11-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
4. Enter the path to the directory containing the objects to be exported in the
Parent Directory box.
(Optional) Click Browse to locate the directory.
5. Specify the name of the export directory in the Export Directory box.
6. (Optional) Type comments related to the export operation in the Reason box.
7. Use the buttons to the right of the Target Sites list to select the Multi-Site
Collaboration export destinations for the objects.
8. (Optional) Set the export preferences by clicking Export Settings
9. Click OK to export the objects in the Object List and close the dialog box.
You can view STEP files in the stand-alone viewer only. In addition, to work
with STEP files in the stand-alone viewer, you must have the optional STEP
geometry license.
10. Click OK to export the objects in the Object List and close the dialog box.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
11-3
Chapter 11
Caution
To export property data for all objects at all levels, select only the
requirement specification at the peak level.
To export property data for one object at any level, select only the object.
Note
Data is exported also for all direct children and lower level
descendants of the selected object.
To export property data for two or more objects, use the standard Windows
functions for multiple selection.
Note
11-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Caution
Export for Markup generates a Word document containing the markups for
the selected requirement specification or requirement revision.
Siemens PLM Software does not support markups when different
Microsoft Office versions are used. For example, if a markup
comment is created in Microsoft Office 2007, it does not open
in Microsoft Office 2010.
Caution
Export for structure editing and work offline generates a live Word
document that you can store outside of Teamcenter, for example, on a
local or shared drive.
In the offline document, you can:
Accumulate structure edits while disconnected from Teamcenter.
Commit pending edits to the structure by connecting to the
Teamcenter server.
For more information about working in live Word offline documents, see
the Client for Microsoft Office Guide.
Check out objects before export explicitly checks out the selected
objects from Teamcenter before the live Word document is generated.
You reserve access to the objects until you check them in, either when
you commit changes to the structure or cancel the changes.
Note
4. To use Word export templates other than the defaults, do the following under
Template Override:
Warning
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
11-5
Chapter 11
Warning
The Copy URL button is unavailable if you select more than one
object to export.
The Copy URL button is unavailable if the Check out objects before
export option is selected.
11-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Generate in
Output document
Static Snapshot
mode
Note
You can add, delete, save, and edit your own markups in
the document using the Markup Manager in Word. You
cannot change other users markups.
5. If you selected a directory or file containing Teamcenter objects, the objects are
displayed in the Object List. Select the objects that you want to import using
one of the following methods:
Click All But to select all objects except those that are currently selected.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
11-7
Chapter 11
Note
The report options are offered in addition to the operation log file.
Generate
Import
Report
Preview
Import
Report
Continue
on Error
7. Click Apply to start the import operation and retain the dialog box, or click OK
to start the import operation and exit the dialog box. When the import operation
has successfully completed, you can review the log file.
You can view STEP files in the stand-alone viewer only. In addition, to work
with STEP files in the stand-alone viewer, you must have the optional STEP
geometry license.
1. Select the container object into which the objects will be imported.
2. Choose ToolsImportObjects.
The system displays the Import dialog box.
3. Click STEP in the left pane of the window.
The system displays the STEP Import dialog box.
Note
When you import product data into Teamcenter from a STEP AP203 or
AP214 physical file, it is always imported as a complete item structure.
4. Type the path to the folder containing the STEP file that you want to import in
the Importing Object box, or click Browse
the system directory.
Once a STEP file is selected, the directory path of the selected file is displayed
in the Importing Object box.
The STEP file and all included references are displayed in the Include Reference
section of the dialog box.
11-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
5. Review the objects selected for import, as displayed in the Include Reference list.
If the list accurately reflects the objects that you want to import, click Apply
to start the import operation and retain the dialog box, or click OK to start
the import operation and exit the dialog box.
If the list does not accurately reflect the objects that you want to import, click
Cancel and begin the process again.
When the import operation has successfully completed, you can review the
log file.
The Available Languages box lists the languages you can select as additional
languages for export.
The Select Languages box lists the preconfigured languages for the selected
transfer mode.
c.
Click OK or Apply.
The languages selected for export are displayed in the Languages box.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
11-9
Chapter 11
If you select multiple root objects, no revision rule is applied, so only the
selected root objects, not the structure, are exported.
8. (Optional) Select Open PLM XML File to view the file when the export operation
is complete.
9. (Optional) Select the Perform Export In Background check box to perform an
asynchronous export.
For more information about asynchronous export, see the PLM XML/TC XML
Export Import Administration Guide.
10. Click OK to export the objects in the Object List list and close the dialog box.
When the export completes, a dialog box displays.
If the export was successful, you can click Yes in the dialog box to view the
log file for the export.
If there were errors during the export, the dialog box lists the errors. Click Yes
to view information about the errors that occurred.
Note
Exports that completed without errors in past versions may now show
errors. Previously, unless the PLMXML_log_file_content preference was
set to detailed, errors did not display. The detailed error information now
displays in the log file by default. Setting the PLMXML_log_file_content
preference to detailed produces detailed information of all objects (those
successfully exported and those exported with errors).
11-10
Name
Description
Description
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Name
Description
Import Transfer Mode Specifies the transfer mode used when objects are
Name
imported into your database.
For more information about transfer modes, see the
PLM XML/TC XML Export Import Administration
Guide.
Export Transfer Mode Specifies the transfer mode used when objects are
Name
exported from your database.
For more information about transfer modes, see the
PLM XML/TC XML Export Import Administration
Guide.
Target Sites
Active Incremental
Change
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
11-11
Chapter 11
8. Click Apply to start the import operation and retain the dialog box, or click OK
to start the import operation and exit the dialog box.
The system imports the data as follows:
By default, the imported object has no container reference. You can use
relevant search criteria to find the imported object and so you can copy it to
a folder.
For information about using search criteria for finding imported PLM XML
data, see the Rich Client Interface Guide.
To have Teamcenter import objects into your Newstuff folder, create the
PLMXML_put_objects_in_newstuff_on_import preference and set the
value to TRUE. Imported objects are placed in a folder with the same name
as the imported XML file.
Note
If object names or IDs are encountered that exceed the character limit
for those boxes in Teamcenter, the name and/or ID is truncated when
imported into Teamcenter.
When the import completes, a dialog box appears. You can click Yes in the dialog
box to view the log file for details on the import and information about any
errors that occurred.
Note
11-12
If some of the languages represented in the PLM XML file are supported
in the importing site, the nonsupported languages are ignored for import
and are logged in the importer log.
You can view unsupported languages in the import log file. If there is no
language information in the XML file, the PLM XML file contents are
imported into the database based on your data entry preferences.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
You can import localized property values of objects from a PLM XML file.
The language marked with as primary is imported as attribute master
language. All other languages are imported as translation values with
respective language information.
For information about options, see Preferences for importing remote objects.
4. Click Yes to start the remote import operation.
The Import Remote Options Setting confirmation dialog box displays with the
current remote option settings.
Click No to return to the Import Remote Options dialog box, then click No in
the Import Remote Options dialog box to cancel the operation.
The system displays the Remote Import Progress dialog box. The object
name, operation, and progress status of both active and completed remote
import operations are displayed in the dialog box until it is closed. Once closed,
completed operations are no longer displayed.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
11-13
Chapter 11
Option Settings dialog box when you click Import Remote Option Settings
the Import Remote Options dialog box.
Note
TC_ic_intent_rtype
IMAN_master_form
IMAN_requirement
IMAN_specification
The references included for import are displayed on the Advanced tabbed
page of the Import Remote Options dialog box.
The references displayed in this list are determined by the
values of the TC_relation_required_on_transfer and
TC_relation_required_on_export preferences.
11-14
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Object
Behavior description
PLM00046 I
Released Objects
Bills of Materials
(BOM)
My Teamcenter Guide
11-15
Chapter 11
Object
Behavior description
11-16
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
11-17
Chapter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-3
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-7
12-9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 12-9
12-10
12-11
12-11
12-12
12-12
12-13
. . . 12-13
. . . 12-13
. . . 12-14
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
Running validations
User can view the generated validation results associated with the target, view the
detailed report file stored in the results or delete the selected results. Validation
results can also be used as the basis to determine whether a target conforms to
standards and can be released.
The ToolsValidationRun Validations menu command lets you specify validation
checkers under an agent to verify the selected targets by performing the validation
process defined by the agent. The validation process can store the results of the
validation process as validation results associated with the selected targets.
Validation Manager requires special setup and configuration with third-party
validation tools and Teamcenter workflow processes. This feature may not
be available at your site. For more information, see your local administrator.
Note
1. Select one or more folders, items, item revisions, reuse design element, or shape
design elements in the My Teamcenter or Structure Manager tree.
2. Choose ToolsValidationRun Validations to display the Run Validations
dialog box.
3. Choose a validation agent from the Available Validation Agents shortcut menu.
Note
4. Select one or more validation checkers in the left pane of the Run Validations
dialog box.
PLM00046 I
If you select the top agent revision node from the Available Validation
Checkers tree and click the
button, all validation checkers are added into
the Selected Validation Checkers tree.
If you deselect the top agent revision node from the Selected
Validation Checkers tree, all the validation checkers nodes under the
My Teamcenter Guide
12-1
Chapter 12
Use the add and remove buttons ( and ) to add or remove checkers.
Or double-click the selected checker in the left or right pane to add or
remove checkers.
5. Review the Selected Objects pane at the bottom of the window to confirm the
objects on which the validation is run.
6. Click OK.
The system displays a status message to indicate the validation process has
started.
Note
If you have write access to the selected item revision, the system attaches a
validation result summary to the item revision. This summary lists the result of
each specific validation, either Pass or Fail.
Note
If you want to run validation under single sign-on mode, you must first
install Security Services and configure it on the rich client and the server.
For directions, see the Security Services Installation/Customization manual.
After NX 7.5
If you want to run validation from the client side, no more configuration
is required. Use the standard ug_check_part.bat/pl file under the
TC_BIN directory.
If you want to run validation from the server side, there are two ways to
configure it before running validation:
o
12-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
1. In My Teamcenter, expand the item revision, and open the Validation Results
Summary object to view all the results for the item revision.
2. Select a validation result from the table.
3. Click Open.
The log content appears automatically unless there are multiple files under the
validation result log dataset. If so, the system displays the Validation Reports
dialog box.
Note
Some validations may not return report files. Also, a report file must
correspond by its file extension to one of the accepted file types defined
by the TC_VALIDATION_FILE_TYPES preference.
4. If there are multiple files under the validation result, select the report file from
the list and click Open.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
12-3
Chapter 12
Note
The viewer pane contains result filters, a result table, and a collapsible
information area.
You can add or remove columns from the result table at run time.
When you select a target object from My Teamcenter, you can use four ways to start
the Validation Results Viewer view:
12-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Click the HOME toolbar button in Validation Manager and select an object.
The associated validation results are displayed in the Validation Results Viewer
view.
Note
The system does not traverse child BOM lines when you view validation
results from the Structure Manager window. Only selected BOM lines are
listed in the navigator tree in the Validation Results Viewer view. To view
validation results from the entire Structure Manager tree or subtree, expand
the tree in Structure Manager and select all expanded BOM lines.
PLM00046 I
List boxes
Buttons
My Teamcenter Guide
12-5
Chapter 12
By default, the Validation Results Viewer view and Selected Workspace Object
view are not shown in Validation Manager perspective. Only when you use these
methods to start the Validation Results Viewer view to see results can the two views
be displayed.
When you select a workspace object or multiple objects from My Teamcenter,
and choose Send ToValidation Results Viewer, it not only opens the Selected
Workspace Objects View, but also opens the Validation Results Viewer. If you
select multiple objects and send them to the Validation Result Viewer view, multiple
Selected Workspace Object Views are opened just like you send multiple objects to
My Teamcenter. The selected folders, items, and revisions are displayed in Selected
Workspace Object View similar to My Teamcenter.
Summary view options include:
Option
Description
Agent
Checker
Target Type
Description
Show
Out-of-Date
Show
Up-to-Date
Show Not-Run
Lists all targets that are not validated against selected validation
checkers.
Show Passed
Show Failed
12-6
Data
Description
Validation
Target
Lists the datasets associated with the item revision for which
the validations were performed.
Validation
Name
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Data
Description
Validation
Agent
Override
Request State
Validation Date Lists the date and time each validation was performed.
Up-to-date
Validation
Result
Validation
User
Note
You can customize the Summary view by modifying the validation result
summary rendering style sheet. For example, a link to a requirement object
can be added and displayed for a selected RDDV result. Click the link and
the requirement objects appear in a window.
For more information about rich client customization, see the Client
Customization Programmers Guide.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
12-7
Chapter 12
Rule Set
Validation Status
Evaluate button
Note
For more information about validation rules, see Validation Manager Guide.
The evaluated status descriptions include:
12-8
Status
Description
Evaluation
passes
Result out of
date due to
part changed
The part Last-Modified Date is later than the date that the
validation was performed, and the result was saved into
Teamcenter.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Status
Description
Result failed
Parameter
verification
failed
Result not
found
Missing result
log file
VO - Validation Result
Displays all validation results from the specified search criteria.
For more information about generating Report Builder summary and item reports,
see the Report Builder Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
12-9
Chapter 12
Note
Permanent
The approved override request always applies to the validation result
until the original request user deletes the override request.
Temporary
The approved override request applies only to the validation result until
the test reruns and validation result updates. The system automatically
removes the approved override request and updates the validation result
after the test reruns.
b.
c.
Type a reason for the override request in the Detailed Reason box.
Note
f.
12-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
User list or change to a different decision user, notification mails are sent to
the current selected decision user and/or the previous selected decision user.
Note
3. Click OK.
Pending
The override is awaiting review.
Approved
The reviewers accept the override. The Result column shows the override
result.
Rejected
One or more of the reviewers deny the request. The Result column shows
the original validation result.
4. View the detail status and provide comments in the Detail Information box.
a. Select one result in the Results Viewer view.
b.
PLM00046 I
For override requests with Approved or Rejected status, when you edit
the override request, the system resets the request to Pending status.
My Teamcenter Guide
12-11
Chapter 12
Only the user who made the original request can edit an override request.
12-12
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
5. Click OK.
The updated Validation Results Viewer view appears.
When the override request is rejected, the Override Request State column
indicates the Rejected status, and the Result column displays the original
status.
After the select-signoff-team task is complete, the process continues in the workflow
and members of the signoff team receive the signoff task.
Perform an override approval task in a result override approval process
1. In My Worklist, select the perform-signoff task.
2. Choose ActionsPerform.
The system displays the Signoff Decision dialog box.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
12-13
Chapter 12
An e-mail notifying the old approver and the new approver that their
assignments have changed includes this message:
You are no longer the approver of this override request.
An e-mail notifying the requester that the override request has been approved
includes this message:
Your override request is approved by [Approver].
An e-mail notifying the requester that the override request has been rejected
includes this message:
Your override request is rejected by [Approver].
An e-mail notifying the approver and the requester that the override request has
been deleted includes this message:
The override request is deleted.
See comment on the Result Detail panel.
An e-mail notifying the approver that the override request has been updated
includes this message:
The override request is updated by [Requester].
12-14
VAL-check-validation-result
VAL-check-validation-result-with-rules
VAL-set-condition-by-check-validation-result
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
These three handlers and the extension are applicable to the validation
results generated by the NX Check-Mate and NX RDDV validation agents.
Its validation results summary and associated validation results are not copied.
The item revision after revise does not display the validation results summary.
There are two methods you can use if you want to copy as object the validation
results summary and the associated validation results when the target dataset
is copied as object.
Siemens PLM Software recommends that you set the deep copy rule for the
ItemRevision business object to the ValidationMaster Form related object to
CopyAsObject for the TC_Validation relation type.
For more information, see Copy validation results by setting the deep copy rule
for ValidationMaster Form to CopyAsObject.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
12-15
Chapter 12
An alternative method, which is not recommended, is to set the deep copy rule for
the ValidationMaster Form related object to NoCopy and use the predefined
Copy_Validation_Results extension.
For more information, see Copying validation results by assigning a Business
Modeler IDE predefined extension.
Note
You must use one method or the other; you cannot use both.
2. On the ItemRevision tab, add or edit the deep copy rules for the
ValidationMaster Form business object with the following settings:
12-16
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
Instead, Siemens PLM Software recommends that you set the deep copy rule
for the ValidationMaster Form business object to CopyAsObject.
For more information about that method, see Copy validation results by
setting the deep copy rule for ValidationMaster Form to CopyAsObject.
You must use either that method or the following one, you cannot use both.
1. In the Business Modeler IDE, open the ItemRevision business object, click the
Deep Copy Rules tab, and verify the following settings for the UGMASTER
attached business object.
2. On the Deep Copy Rules tab, verify the following settings for the
ValidationMaster Form attached business object.
The extension copies the results that are up-to-date and ignores the
outdated results at the time when the extension is executed.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
12-17
Chapter 12
The Validation Result class can be extended from the Business Modeler
IDE. If the customized validation result objects have specific business logic,
Siemens PLM Software recommends that you create corresponding transfer
modes to export and import them.
For more information, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide.
For more information about transfer mode context string, defining and using transfer
modes, as well as how to export and import objects, see the PLM XML Export Import
Administration Guide.
The report files may not appear if environment variables are not defined properly
to display named references.
12-18
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
12-19
Chapter
13 Using workflows
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 13-7
. 13-7
. 13-8
. 13-9
13-10
13-10
13-11
13-11
13-13
13-14
13-14
13-15
13-15
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-16
13-17
13-17
13-18
13-18
13-19
13-19
13-19
13-20
13-21
13-21
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...........
..........
generate a list
...........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-5
13-5
13-6
13-6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
of objects as target or reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
My Teamcenter Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-25
13-26
13-28
13-28
13-28
13-30
13-30
13-31
13-32
13-32
13-33
13-33
13-34
13-34
13-36
13-37
13-37
13-38
13-38
13-40
13-41
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-41
13-41
13-42
13-42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43
pool of a group, role, or role in a
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43
. . . . . . 13-44
. . . . . . 13-44
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-44
13-46
13-47
13-48
13-48
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-50
13-52
13-52
13-52
13-53
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-54
13-55
13-56
13-57
13-57
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-58
13-58
13-59
13-60
13-61
13-62
13-62
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
13 Using workflows
Note
Workflow elements
Workflows pass documents, information, and tasks between participants during the
completion of a particular process. A workflow process can be large and complicated
or simple and straightforward.
Note
Workflow element
Description
Workflow template
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-1
Chapter 13
Using workflows
Workflow element
Description
Container tasks
Review
Contains select-signoff-team and perform-signoffs
tasks. The Decision options are Approve, Reject, and
No Decision.
Acknowledge
Contains select-signoff-team and perform-signoffs
tasks. The Decision options are Acknowledged and
Not Acknowledged.
Route
Contains Review, Acknowledge and Notify tasks.
Interactive tasks
select-signoff-team
The assigned user is required to select a signoff team to
sign off the target object of the task.
perform-signoffs
Assigned users are required to review and sign off the
target object of the task.
Do
The assigned user is required to review and perform
the task instructions, then mark the task complete.
Notify
The assigned user is required to reply.
13-2
Process tasks
Parent processes
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Workflow element
Description
Workflow handlers
Task attributes
Quorum
requirements
To view the progress of tasks in a workflow in which you are not a participant,
use Workflow Viewer.
To view processes in Workflow Viewer, use the Send To command from the
My Teamcenter shortcut menu, from the Search Results view, and from the
Referencers tab.
For more information about viewing workflow processes, see the Workflow Viewer
Guide.
Task states
The actions you can perform on a task are determined by the current task state.
Task states control and coordinate execution of individual tasks in a process. Tasks
are always in one of the defined states described in the table. The symbol associated
with each task is displayed in the upper-left corner of the task box in the process view.
State
Pending
Symbol
Description
The task has not yet been started. A task
cannot start until the previous release level has
completed.
Note
Started
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-3
Using workflows
Chapter 13
State
Symbol
Description
Completed
Skipped
Suspended
Failed
Unassigned
Aborted
Workflow participants
A process initiator is a user who initiates a workflow process. A responsible party is a
user with a workflow task in an inbox.
When you initiate a workflow process, you are the process owner. The root task
of the process is placed in your inbox, and you become the responsible party.
When a task assigned to a user arrives in the users inbox, that user becomes
the responsible party.
Whenever any task in the process is not explicitly assigned to another user,
person, or resource pool, Teamcenter defaults responsibility for the task to the
process owner.
13-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Note
You can:
Reassign a task.
Reassigning a task transfers ownership of the parent task to the selected
user and makes that user the responsible party for the task.
Reassigning a task does not transfer your signoff responsibility.
Use your Inbox to perform workflow jobs and view task information.
If your inbox contains unviewed tasks, the inbox name is highlighted and the
number of unviewed tasks is displayed.
Each inbox contains two folders, Tasks to Perform and Tasks to Track.
My Worklist
Gordon, Jack (jgordon) Inbox
Tasks to Perform
000002/A;1Item2 (perform-signoffs)
000004/A;1Item4 (Author Technical Recommendation)
Tasks to Track
Note
The Tasks to Perform and Tasks to Track folders associated with remote
inboxes cannot be expanded in the tree. To access these folders, click the link
corresponding to the Inbox.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-5
Using workflows
Chapter 13
Black
The task has no duration.
Green
The task has a duration that has not yet been exceeded.
Red
The task has a duration that has been exceeded.
When a task is completed, it moves from the Tasks to Perform list to the Tasks
to Track list.
Note
Duration is based on the start date plus time. The duration includes
weekends and holidays and is based on a 7-day week.
13-6
Task names are displayed with the process name first, followed by the task
name in parentheses. In addition, the corresponding tree-node symbol identifies
the task type.
The names of tasks that have not been viewed are displayed in bold text. This
applies only to tasks that are started or suspended.
Tasks are not considered to have been viewed by users when they reassign the
task.
Signoff tasks are not considered to have been viewed by users when they
delegate signoff to another user unless the user is the responsible party, in which
case the task is considered viewed.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Note
You use your My Worklist inbox to complete tasks assigned to you, including
those originating at a remote site, and you can use and manage address lists and
resource pools. For example, you can perform a select-signoff-team task.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-7
Using workflows
Chapter 13
Note
The Route task contains a Review task, an Acknowledge task, and a Notify
task. The Route task contains both signoff team subtasks.
The Route task also lets you specify the action for each user: Review,
Acknow (for acknowledge), or Notify.
You can select a signoff team either by completing predefined profiles or by ad hoc
selection.
Signoff Team
Profiles
Predefined profiles
Engineering/Designer/1
*/Standards Engineer/2
Users
Ad hoc selection
Address Lists
The requirements of the selected workflow template determine the method used
to select a signoff team.
Predefined profiles
An administrator defines profiles and associates them with workflow processes.
When you initiate a workflow process that contains predefined signoff profiles,
you must select the specified number of users for each specified group and role.
For example, a typical workflow can include predefined signoff profiles that
require one user who is a member of the Engineering group and whose role
is Designer, and two users who are members of any group and whose role is
Standards Engineer.
Ad hoc selection
Ad hoc selection allows the initializing user, address list members, and resource
pool members to add users to the signoff team individually. When the task
template contains predefined signoff profiles, the ad hoc selections make
one-time-only additions to the required signoff team. When the task template
does not contain predefined signoff profiles, the ad hoc additions are the entire
signoff team.
13-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
The group, role, and user name of the assigned members is displayed for
group/role/#, where # indicates the number of users required on the signoff
team for that particular group and role.
You can replace group and role with an asterisk (*) to represent all groups
and roles.
Select the additional users you want to add to the signoff team.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-9
Chapter 13
Using workflows
The system displays the Signoff Team tree in the left pane of the window.
b.
c.
d. Select a user, then click Add to assign the user to the signoff team.
e.
Repeat the previous steps to assign additional users to the signoff team.
c.
Click Add.
The group, role, and user values for each member are listed below the
selected address list.
7. Click Apply.
The task is complete and the Viewer tab now displays No View Data Available.
Complete signoff team selection for an entire workflow
Rather than select signoff teams as the select-signoff-team task appears in your
worklist, you can select signoff team members for all the different signoff teams
required within an entire workflow using process assignment lists.
For information about using process assignment lists, see Assigning all tasks in a
process using process assignment lists.
View signoff team profiles
1. In My Worklist, select a select-signoff-team task.
2. Choose ViewTask Properties
13-10
tab.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
The task breakdown tree displays the group/user profiles of the signoff team.
The Signoff Quorum box displays the number of users who must sign off
to complete the task.
4. Click Close.
Note
When you are a member of the signoff team, the perform-signoffs subtask
appears in your worklist. Each member of the signoff team is responsible for
reviewing the target object, then indicating a decision.
o
Note
The Not Acknowledged and No Decision choices do not count toward the
quorum count. If your decision is required to meet quorum requirements,
this subtask cannot complete until you select either Acknowledged or
Approve.
If your companys business practices dictate that you must be logged on under
a specific group and role to complete a perform-signoffs task, the system
displays a message and allows you to change your group and role to match the
task requirements.
When the functionality is enabled, you can see when other users are available
for instant messaging with Microsoft Office Communicator. You can view the
current status of other users on the signoff list, and you can click the Microsoft
Office Communicator symbol to initiate communication.
For information about configuring Teamcenter instant messaging with Microsoft
Office Communicator, see the Application Administration Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-11
Chapter 13
Using workflows
The system displays the Perform Signoff pane listing process information.
Responsible Party
When the Responsible Party entry displays as an active link, you can
reassign the parent task by clicking the link and selecting a new group,
role, and user.
Reassigning the task transfers ownership of the parent task to the selected
user, making that user the Responsible Party for the task. It does not,
however, transfer your signoff responsibility.
Instructions
When the Instructions link is displayed, there are instructions for the task.
You can view the instructions by clicking the link.
Attachments
When there are attachments to the workflow process, you can view them by
clicking the Attachments link.
The system displays the Attachments dialog box. Target and reference
attachments are listed beneath the signoff task in the task tree.
All Comments
If the All Comments entry is present and is as an active link, comments are
written for the task. You can view the comments by clicking the link.
3. (Optional) If you are a privileged user because you are the process owner, the
responsible party, or a member of the administration group, you can delegate
your signoff responsibility for the perform-signoffs subtask to another user.
Note
Select a new user from the Group, Role, and User lists.
c.
Click OK.
Teamcenter assigns the task to the specified user and the task is placed in
their Tasks to Perform folder.
Select an option.
13-12
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Note
c.
d. Click OK.
If user authentication is required to complete the task, type your password
in the Password box, and click OK.
Note
The task is complete and the Viewer tab now displays No View Data Available.
Complete a Do task
1. Click the Do task
2. (Optional.) If you know you have additional tasks to perform before you can
perform the current task, you can create a subprocess from this task. The
subprocess must complete before the current task can complete.
For more information about creating a subprocess, see What are workflow
subprocesses?.
3. Click the Viewer tab and select the Task View option.
4. Complete the task according to the instructions in the Instructions box.
5. Type your password in the Password box.
The system displays this box if user authentication is required for the completion
of the task.
Note
If your site employs Security Services, you must use the Security
Services password rather than your Teamcenter password.
7. Click Apply.
The task is complete and the Viewer tab now displays No View Data Available.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-13
Using workflows
Chapter 13
If a condition task fails, a log file and corresponding dataset are added to the
process as a reference attachment in the Tasks Attachments References folder.
You can complete Condition tasks that are in a pending state. However, this
prevents the task from appearing in the assigned users Inbox.
Performing an automatic Condition task while it is pending preempts the query
results, allowing you to override the query and manually set the task to True
or False.
If you perform a Condition task while it is still in a pending state, you can return
to the task and reset the True/False/Unset setting at any point before the
task reaches a started state.
Note
2. (Optional) If you know you have additional tasks to perform before you can
perform the current task, you can create a subprocess from this task. The
subprocess must complete before the current task can complete.
For more information about creating a subprocess, see What are workflow
subprocesses?.
3. Click the Viewer tab and select the Task View option.
4. Complete the task according to the instructions in the Task Instructions box.
5. Set the Task Result to True or False, based on the requirements listed in
the Instructions box. This setting determines whether the workflow process
continues along the true or false branch from the Condition task.
Setting the condition path to Unset prevents the task from completing and
pauses the workflow process.
Note
13-14
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Note
If your site employs Security Services, you must use the Security
Services password rather than your Teamcenter password.
Customized tasks generally involve custom forms that are unique to your
companys processes. Incorporating company forms into a customized
task further automates the workflow process.
2. Click the Viewer tab and select the Task View option.
Note
The selected custom task varies depending on the form and other tasks
in the process.
3. Complete the steps listed in the dialog box, following instructions provided by
the system administrator.
Click the button provided to complete the task and close the dialog box.
The task is complete and the Viewer tab now displays No View Data Available.
Click the Viewer tab, and then choose the Task View option at the top of
the Viewer pane.
c.
Click Users
d. Select a group, role, and user to whom the task will be assigned.
e.
f.
Click Add.
The system displays the user information and action assigned to that user
beneath the task node in the process tree.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-15
Using workflows
Chapter 13
g.
Click Modify
to change the group, role, or user definition for a particular
user or to modify the user action.
Click the Viewer tab, and select the Task View option at the top of the Viewer
pane.
c.
Select the Address Lists option to display the Address Lists list.
f.
Click Add.
The system displays the address list in the Signoff Team tree.
g.
3. (Optional) Modify or set the quorum value for Review and Acknowledge tasks
in the Rev Quorum and Acknow Quorum boxes.
4. Select the Ad-hoc done check box to indicate you have completed the task
assignments.
5. Click Apply.
The task is complete and the Viewer tab now displays No View Data Available.
13-16
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
For more information about setting permissions, see the Access Manager Guide.
For more information about the EPM-set-rule-based-protection workflow handler,
see the Workflow Designer Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-17
Chapter 13
Using workflows
Note
Demoting a Review task voids any signoff decisions that have been
made.
2. Choose ActionsUndo.
The system displays the Demote Action Comments dialog box.
3. Type your comments in the box. These comments appear in the audit file.
4. Click OK to change the task state to Pending.
The workflow returns to the previous task.
Note
2. Choose ActionsStart.
The system displays the Start Action Comments dialog box.
3. Type your comments in the box. These comments appear in the audit file.
4. Click OK to move the task to a started state.
13-18
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Note
Suspend a task
1. Select the task you want to suspend.
Note
2. Choose ActionsSuspend.
The system displays the Suspend Action Comments dialog box.
3. Type your comments in the box. These comments appear in the audit file.
4. Click OK to move the task to a suspended state.
Note
Resume a task
1. Select the desired suspended task.
Note
2. Choose ActionsResume.
The system displays the Resume Action Comments dialog box.
3. Type your comments in the box.
4. Click OK to move the task to the state that it was in prior to being suspended.
Note
Abort a task
1. Select the task you want to cancel and choose ActionsAbort.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-19
Chapter 13
Using workflows
The Responsible Party box displays the responsible party for the selected
task.
This box cannot be modified.
The Named ACL box displays the named ACL assigned to this task (if any).
This box cannot be modified from this dialog box, although you can open the
Named ACL dialog box for reference.
For more information about named ACLs and Access Manager best practices,
see the Access Manager Guide.
For Review and Acknowledge tasks, the Signoffs Quorum box displays the
number of users who must approve the Signoff task to reach a quorum, the
recipients, and other information such as the due date and duration.
You can set Recipients in this dialog box, but you cannot set or modify other
values, including the quorum value. The quorum value is set when the
workflow process is initiated.
If a Condition task is selected, the Condition Query box displays the name
of the assigned query.
If a Condition task is selected, the Condition Result box displays the result
of the query, either True or False. If a query has not yet been defined, the
result is listed as unset.
5. Click Close.
13-20
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-21
Using workflows
Chapter 13
Note
The initiator of the process uses this framework to assign to other users the
responsibility of signing off tasks.
A process template can include workflow handlers that automate some or all of
the assignments.
For more information about workflow handlers, see the Workflow Designer Guide.
If your site uses static templates, a user who initiates a process can select only
from the available, saved process templates.
13-22
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
To view only those process templates assigned to your group, select the
Assigned option.
Note
6. Click the Attachments tab to view or assign target and reference attachments.
It is not necessary to assign target data at the initiation of a process.
7. Click the Process Template tab to view the process template selected as the
basis of the new process.
8. (Optional) Assign all tasks in the process.
a. Click the Assign All Tasks tab.
The system displays the assignment list information.
b.
c.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-23
Chapter 13
Using workflows
Profiles limit the pool of users that can be assigned to the task.
The system displays the Profiles node when user profiles were
defined as part of the process template.
You can copy user nodes and paste them in to another task using
the Copy and Paste buttons located beneath the tree.
e.
(Optional) Modify or set the quorum value for Review and Acknowledge
tasks in the Rev Quorum and Acknow Quorum boxes.
f.
1. Select the objects in other sources that you want to add to the paste list. For
example, objects displayed as the result of a search or those displayed in an
open rich client application.
13-24
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
2. Select either the Targets or References folder on the Attachments tab of the
New Process dialog box.
3. Click Advanced Paste, located at the bottom of the New Process dialog box.
The system displays the Advanced Paste dialog box.
4. Select one or more of the following options in the Advanced Paste dialog box:
From Referencers
Displays a list of My Teamcenter objects, such as prior searches and the
Home folder. You can select one or more objects from the list.
From PSE
Displays open BOM windows.
a. Select a BOM window.
The system displays the Collect BomElements dialog box.
b.
c.
Click GO to collect the elements and add them to the paste list.
From Application
Displays the active applications in your session.
Select an application to add all objects currently selected in that application
window to the paste list.
The system displays a check mark to the left of the source button to indicate that
objects from that source have been added to the paste list.
5. Click OK.
The system pastes the object references into the selected attachment folder.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-25
Chapter 13
Using workflows
Generally, any user can create a workflow subprocess from a task within their
worklist. This functionality is not limited to privileged users.
Note
When you create a workflow subprocess from an in-process task in your worklist, you
create a dependency between the selected task in the parent process and the newly
created subprocess. The targets of the active parent workflow process are carried
over if you check the Inherit Targets box.
Create a workflow subprocess
You can create workflow subprocesses while performing tasks from your worklist or
Workflow Viewer.
To create workflow subprocesses from My Worklist in My Teamcenter:
1. In the My Worklist tree, under the InboxTasks to Perform folder, select the
task for which you want to create a subprocess.
The task you select becomes dependent upon the workflow subprocess. It cannot
complete until the workflow subprocess completes.
2. Do one of the following:
6. Click the Process Template list to view available workflow process templates
and make a selection.
Your selection determines the workflow that will be initiated as a workflow
subprocess.
7. (Optional) Select the Inherit Targets check box if you want the new workflow
subprocess to include all the targets of the parent workflow process.
13-26
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
8. (Optional) Click the Attachments tab to view or assign target and reference
attachments.
9. (Optional) Click the Process Template tab to view the process template selected
as the basis of the new process.
10. (Optional) Assign all tasks in the process.
a. Click the Assign All Tasks tab.
b.
c.
Assign users:
A. Expand the task node in the tree to begin to assign the responsibility
of performing each task to users.
If the selected task requires users, or users of a specific/group role
profile, to perform the task, the Users node or Profiles node appears
under the task.
B. Select the task, or if available, the Users or Profiles node within the task.
C. Use the Organization and Project Teams trees to select users to be
responsible for performing the selected task.
D. Alternatively, use Resource Pool Options to select a resource pool to be
responsible for performing the task.
E. The action that the selected users are responsible for display next to
the Action option.
The action list is based on the task type. For example, if a Route task is
selected, the Review, Acknowledge, and Notify actions are displayed.
If a Review task is selected, only the Review action is available; if an
Acknowledge task is selected, only the Acknowledge action is available.
F. Click Add.
The system displays the user information and action assigned to that
user beneath the task node in the process tree.
G. Repeat the previous steps to continue to assign user responsibility for
performing other tasks in the tree.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-27
Chapter 13
Using workflows
e.
f.
For information about assigning all tasks when you initiate a new process,
see Initiate a workflow process.
13-28
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Teamcenter applies the assignment list to the tasks in the process. Users are
displayed as nodes in the process tree, and the action assigned to the user is
displayed to the right of the tree under the Actions heading.
Note
Use the Group, Role, and User lists to select the responsible party.
c.
d. Repeat the previous steps to assign a responsible party for other tasks in
the process.
5. (Optional) Modify the task assignments by assigning users to review,
acknowledge, or receive notification of a task.
a. Expand the task node in the tree to display the Users node and the Profiles
node.
The Users node lets you assign resources using an ad hoc selection
process.
The Profiles node, displayed when user profiles are defined as part of the
process template, lets you limit the pool of users that can be assigned
to the task.
b.
c.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-29
Chapter 13
Using workflows
f.
Tip
g.
(Optional) Modify or set the quorum value for Review and Acknowledge
tasks in the Rev Quorum and Acknow Quorum boxes.
6. (Optional) To save modifications to the process assignment list, select the Save
Modifications Back to List check box.
Note
7. Click Assign.
Teamcenter sends the tasks to the Tasks to Perform folders of the assignees.
Claim a task
You can claim a task from a resource pool or another user whose worklist you have
access to. This reassigns the task to you and makes you the responsible party. This
is a simpler way of reassigning a task to yourself using the Assign action.
1. Click My Worklist.
2. Click the task you want to claim from either a resource pool you are subscribed
to or another users worklist that you have access to.
3. Choose ActionsClaim Task.
4. If the task is assigned to a single user, such as a Do task or select-signoff-team
task, click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
If the task is assigned to multiple users, such as a perform-signoffs task, the
Claim Perform Signoff dialog box appears.
5. In the Claim Perform Signoff dialog box, select the user you want to claim the
task from and click Claim.
If the Claim button is not active after selecting a user, you cannot claim the
task from that user.
The task appears in your worklist, and you become the responsible party for the task.
Reassign a task
If you are the responsible party or a privileged user, you can reassign any task that
has not already been started.
For example, if you are the initiator of a process, the tasks of selecting a signoff
team and performing signoffs are automatically assigned to you. You may want to
reassign one or both of these tasks to another user.
13-30
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Note
You can only reassign a task to another user who meets the group and
role criteria defined for the selected task.
If you want to reassign the task to yourself, use the Claim Task menu
command instead.
For more information about claiming tasks, see Claim a task.
Select individual tasks to be reassigned, or click the Select All the Tasks
button to select all displayed tasks.
Note
Click the Clear the Selection button to clear selections you have
made in the tree.
6. Click OK or click Cancel at any time to cancel the operation without making
changes to the database.
Assign one or more tasks to other users
1. Select the current task in your Tasks to Perform folder.
2. Choose ActionsAssign.
The system displays the Assign Responsible Party dialog box.
3. Use the Organization or Project Teams tab to select the responsible party.
Note
You can only reassign tasks to a user who meets the group and role
criteria specified for the task.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-31
Using workflows
Chapter 13
Select individual tasks to be reassigned, or click the Select All the Tasks
button to select all displayed tasks.
Note
Click the Clear the Selection button to clear selections you have
made in the tree.
While performing a task, the responsible party can reassign responsibility for
the task to another user.
When a task is reassigned to a user other than the process owner, the process
owner and the responsible party are different users.
The user who initiates the workflow process must select a signoff team. As the
process progresses, a select-signoff-team task appears in the Tasks to Perform
folder of the process initiators Inbox each time a task requiring a signoff team
reaches a Started state.
Tasks that require signoff teams include:
Review tasks
Acknowledge tasks
Route tasks
When you are assigned a select-signoff-team task, you select users as signoff team
members who are assigned the responsibility of signing off a target object, such as
a document.
You can assign signoff responsibility to an entire address list or resource pool
of users, as well as individual users.
You can select a signoff team in the Task Hierarchy tree and the Task Flow pane.
A green light in the upper left hand corner of the task node indicates that a signoff
team has been assigned.
13-32
Workflows configured to use dynamic participants let you use the Assign
Participants command to assign roles to data.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Note
When a role under a group is selected with Any Member or with All
Members, choose Specific Group or Any Group.
5. Click OK.
For more information about task state symbols and descriptions, see Task states.
To use Workflow Viewer to view the progress of tasks in a workflow in which you are
not a participant, use the Send ToWorkflow Viewer shortcut menu command from
the Search Results view, the Referencers tab, or My Teamcenter.
For more information about viewing workflow processes, see the Workflow Viewer
Guide.
View a workflow process or current task
PLM00046 I
To view a workflow process, you can select the process in your inbox and click the
Viewer tab. The system displays the process view.
My Teamcenter Guide
13-33
Using workflows
Chapter 13
To view the current task, rather than the entire process, you can select the Task
View option.
Shared lists are generated by members of the DBA group or by a user designated
as a group administrator. These lists are available for use by all users and
cannot be modified by end users.
Private lists can be created by any user and are only visible to that user.
Tip
4. (Optional) Select the Create Shared List check box. This option is only available
to members of the DBA group and to group administrators.
5. (Optional) Type a description of the process assignment list in the Description
box.
6. Click the Resources tab.
The system displays the process and its associated task templates in a tree
structure. You can view the task flow by clicking the Process View tab. This view
allows you to view the subtasks, handlers and properties of the selected task.
Note
13-34
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Use the Group, Role, and User lists to select the responsible party.
c.
d. Repeat the previous steps to assign a responsible party for other tasks in
the process.
Assign users:
a. Expand the task node in the tree to begin to assign users to review,
acknowledge, or receive notification of a task.
The system displays the Users node and the Profiles node.
The Users node allows you to assign resources using an ad hoc selection
process.
Profiles limit the pool of users that can be assigned to the task.
The system displays the Profiles node when user profiles were defined as
part of the process template.
b.
c.
f.
PLM00046 I
You can copy user nodes and paste them in to another task using the
Copy and Paste buttons located beneath the tree.
My Teamcenter Guide
13-35
Chapter 13
Using workflows
g.
(Optional) Modify or set the quorum value for Review and Acknowledge
tasks in the Rev Quorum and Acknow Quorum boxes.
7. Click Create.
The system displays the process assignment list in your My Lists folder.
Modify task assignments in your process assignment lists
1. In My Teamcenter, choose ToolsProcess Assignment ListCreate/Edit.
The system displays the Create/Edit Assignment List dialog box.
2. Select a list from the My Lists folder. If you are a group administrator you can
modify lists contained in the My Group Lists folder, as well as those contained
in the My Lists folder. If you are a member of a DBA group, you can modify
lists contained in any of the folders.
3. Assign responsible parties to the task:
a. Click the Resources tab.
b.
c.
Use the Group, Role, and User lists to select the responsible party.
Repeat the previous steps to assign a responsible party for other tasks in
the process.
13-36
b.
c.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
f.
Tip
g.
(Optional) Modify or set the quorum value for Review and Acknowledge
tasks in the Rev Quorum and Acknow Quorum boxes.
If you do not select a new group member, the old group member is
removed from the process assignment list.
6. Click Next.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-37
Using workflows
Chapter 13
The system displays all process assignment lists that include the user designated
as the old group member.
7. Select the lists in the Lists Found section and click Add (+) to move the lists
to the Selected Lists section.
Teamcenter replaces the user in these lists.
8. Click Finish.
The system displays the Replace Success dialog box.
9. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Importing and exporting process assignment lists
You can use Import and Export options in the Create/Edit Assignment List dialog
box to import and export process assignment lists (PALs) in PLM XML format.
When importing a PAL and the importing site does not have one with the
same name:
The PAL is successfully imported if at least one resource is assigned
to the PAL.
The associated workflow template is also successfully imported if
a template with the same origin_id property does not exist at the
importing site.
Otherwise, neither the PAL nor the template is successfully imported.
When the Overwrite Duplicate Assignment Lists check box is not selected, a
PAL with the same name as one at the importing site is not imported.
When the Overwrite Duplicate Assignment Lists check box is selected, and
you import a PAL that has the same name as one at the importing site:
The PAL successfully overwrites the one at the importing site if at least
one resource is assigned to the PAL and a workflow template with the
same origin_id property exists at the importing site.
Otherwise, neither the PAL nor the template is successfully imported.
13-38
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Note
Duration is based on the start date plus time. The duration includes
weekends and holidays, and is based on a 7-day week. For times
exceeding a single week, you should include the nonwork days in the
duration time.
1. From your inbox in My Worklist, select a task in the Tasks to Track or Tasks
to Perform folder.
2. Open the Viewer view and select the Process View.
3. Click Task Properties
on the toolbar.
Years
Weeks
Days
Hours
Minutes
After you set a duration for the task, you must create a list of recipients to
receive late notices by Teamcenter mail if the task becomes overdue. You can
specify individual users or assign multiple users to the task using address lists.
6. Define the recipient list by typing a comma-separated list of user names in the
Recipients box in the Task Properties dialog box or as follows:
a. Click Set to the right of the Recipients box.
The system displays the Select Recipients dialog box.
b.
Locate a user, group, or address list by entering the name, or a partial name
and wildcard character, in the Search box and clicking the User, Group, or
Address list button. You can display all users, groups, or address lists by
entering an asterisk (*) in the Search box.
The system displays the search results in the area beneath the Search box.
c.
Select the users, groups, or address list from the results and click To.
d. Click OK to accept the recipient list and exit the Select Recipients dialog box.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-39
Chapter 13
Using workflows
The system displays the names of the recipients in the Recipients box of the
Task Properties dialog box.
7. Click Close to exit the Task Properties dialog box.
You can set a due date for a task and create a list of users who are
notified if the task is not completed by the due date, but you can only set
due dates for tasks that are started.
1. From your inbox in My Worklist, select a task in the Tasks to Track or Tasks
to Perform folder.
2. Click Task Properties
on the toolbar.
Select the month in which the task becomes due. Click the right-arrow
button to move forward in the calendar. Click the left-arrow button to move
backward in the calendar.
c.
d. Type the hour and minute by which the task must be completed in the h and
m boxes. Use the 24-hour clock format; for example, type 1:30 p.m. as h: 13
m: 30. If you do not specify another time or clear the boxes, the current
time is entered. If you clear the boxes, the time is set to 0 and no required
completion time is set for the task.
e.
Click OK to accept the due date and time and close the calendar.
You have set a due date for the task. Next, you must create a list of recipients
to receive late notices by Teamcenter mail if the task is not performed by the
due date. You can specify individual users or assign multiple users to the task
using address lists.
4. Define the recipient list by typing a comma-separated list of user names in the
Recipients box in the Task Properties dialog box or as follows:
a. Click Set to the right of the Recipients box.
The system displays the Select Recipients dialog box.
b.
13-40
Locate a user, group, or address list by entering the name, or a partial name
and wildcard character, in the Search box and clicking the User, Group, or
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Address list button. You can display all users, groups, or address lists by
entering an asterisk (*) in the Search box.
The system displays the search results in the area beneath the Search box.
c.
Select the users, groups, or address list from the results and click To.
d. Click OK to accept the recipient list and exit the Select Recipients dialog box.
The system displays the names of the recipients in the Recipients box of the
Task Properties dialog box.
5. Click Close to exit the Task Properties dialog box.
In My Worklist, select a workflow task for which you are the responsible party,
and then click Delete.
In the Impact Analysis view, select the workflow task, and then click Delete.
Note
Work contexts are created from a combination of user name, group, role, and
project; however, it is not necessary to include all four of these elements in the
definition of a work context.
If task can be performed by anyone, regardless of their group and role, the
work context specifies only the project to which the context applies.
If a task can be performed only by a user with a specific role within a group,
the work context definition specifies the project, group, and role, but not a
specific user.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-41
Using workflows
Chapter 13
8. Click OK.
To remove a work context that is assigned to an object, select the work context
and choose Cut from the shortcut menu.
Note
13-42
Work contexts that are not referenced by another object can be deleted from
the database.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Resource pools let you balance workflow task assignments. They allow
open-ended assignments, permitting any user to accept responsibility for a task
that is assigned to a group, role, or a role in a group.
All users can subscribe to resource pool inboxes; however, they can only perform
tasks if they are valid members of the group or are assigned the appropriate role.
Note
Tasks assigned to a resource pool appear in the Tasks to Perform folder and the
Tasks to Track folder of the appropriate resource pool inbox. Any member of the
resource pool can then accept responsibility and perform the task. All members
of a group, role, or role-in-group can take ownership of the assignment. The
assignment is delivered to the Tasks to Perform folder for all members.
Click All to list all groups and roles. If you are not a member of the resource
pools defined group and role, you are not able to access and perform tasks
assigned to the resource pool.
c.
Select the group and role you want assigned to the resource pool.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-43
Using workflows
Chapter 13
Surrogate users can perform workflow tasks when the user to whom the task
was originally assigned is out of the office or is unable to perform the task. This
prevents unnecessary stoppages in the workflow process, yet allows the original
user to retain control of the task.
Multiple surrogate users can be defined for a single task; however, only a single
user can be the active surrogate for the task at any given time.
Surrogate users are automatically granted all access privileges afforded to the
original responsible party or approver.
o
Any user can be designated as a surrogate, but only a user who belongs to
the group and role specified by the task profile can perform a task.
Any user can take responsibility for a task, even if that user does not match
the group and role profile of the task.
Note
You cannot define special access control lists (ACLs) for a surrogate user.
Site administrators can define surrogates for any user within the site.
Group administrators can define surrogates for any user within their group.
If you do not have administrative privileges, you can only define surrogates for
your own tasks.
Define a surrogate for another user (requires administrative privileges)
1. Click My Worklist
13-44
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
You can choose all roles within a group by selecting the asterisk (*)
rather than selecting a specific role.
Select the month in which the surrogate user becomes effective. Click the
back arrow to scroll to the previous month or click the forward arrow to
scroll to the next month.
c.
d. Select the day the surrogate user becomes effective by clicking the
appropriate square on the calendar.
e.
Type the hour, minute, and second at which the surrogate users effectivity
begins in the h, m, and s boxes.
Use the 24-hour clock format; for example, type 1:30 p.m. as 13 h, 30 m,
and 00 s.
If you do not specify another time or clear the boxes, the current time is
entered.
f.
Click OK to accept the effectivity start date and time and close the calendar.
6. Set the Surrogate Effective Dates effectivity end date for the surrogate user:
a. Click the calendar button in the To box to open the popup calendar.
b.
c.
d. Select the day the surrogate users effectivity ends by clicking the appropriate
square on the calendar.
e.
PLM00046 I
Type the hour, minute, and second at which the surrogate users effectivity
ends in the h, m, and s boxes.
My Teamcenter Guide
13-45
Chapter 13
Using workflows
Use the 24-hour clock format; for example, type 1:30 p.m. as 13 h, 30 m,
and 00 s.
If you do not specify another time or clear the boxes, the current time is
entered.
f.
Click OK to accept the effectivity end date and time and close the calendar.
To allow the surrogate user to be effective indefinitely, leave the end
date unset. To reset the effectivity dates, click Reset.
Tip
7. Click Add.
The system displays the surrogate user in the Current Surrogate Users list,
the surrogate user is notified via e-mail, and a link is created in the surrogate
users inbox.
The link in the surrogate users inbox allows the surrogate user to access the
inbox of the user for whom they are acting surrogate.
Define a surrogate for your workflow tasks
1. Click My Worklist
You can choose all roles within a group by selecting the asterisk (*)
rather than selecting a specific role.
4. Set the Surrogate Effective Dates effectivity start date for the surrogate user:
a. Click the calendar button in the From box to open the popup calendar.
b.
Select the month in which the surrogate user becomes effective. Click the
back arrow to scroll to the previous month or click the forward arrow to
scroll to the next month.
c.
Select the year in which the surrogate user becomes effective. Click the
back arrow to scroll to the previous year or click the forward arrow to scroll
to the next year.
d. Select the day the surrogate user becomes effective by clicking the
appropriate square on the calendar.
e.
Type the hour, minute, and second at which the surrogate users effectivity
begins in the h, m, and s boxes.
Use the 24-hour clock format; for example, type 1:30 p.m. as 13 h, 30 m,
and 00 s.
If you do not specify another time or clear the boxes, the current time is
entered.
13-46
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
f.
Click OK to accept the effectivity start date and time and close the calendar.
5. Set the Surrogate Effective Dates effectivity end date for the surrogate user:
You have set the effectivity start date for the surrogate user. Now you must set
the effectivity end date.
a. Click the calendar button in the To box to open the popup calendar.
b.
Select the month in which the surrogate users effectivity ends. Click the
back arrow to scroll to the previous month or click the forward arrow to
scroll to the next month.
c.
Select the year in which the surrogate users effectivity ends. Click the
back arrow to scroll to the previous year or click the forward arrow to scroll
to the next year.
d. Select the day the surrogate users effectivity ends by clicking the appropriate
square on the calendar.
e.
Type the hour, minute, and second at which the surrogate users effectivity
ends in the h, m, and s boxes.
Use the 24-hour clock format; for example, type 1:30 p.m. as 13 h, 30 m,
and 00 s.
If you do not specify another time or clear the boxes, the current time is
entered.
f.
Click OK to accept the effectivity end date and time and close the calendar.
Tip
6. Click Add.
The system displays the surrogate user in the Current Surrogate Users list.
In addition, a link is created in the surrogate users inbox. This link allows
them to access the inbox of the user for whom they are acting surrogate. The
surrogate user is notified via e-mail.
Remove a surrogate user
1. Click My Worklist
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-47
Chapter 13
Using workflows
Stand-In
Allows you to perform the task while allowing the original user to retain
control.
Release
Releases the active surrogate from the task. At this point, the active
surrogate cannot perform the task without first reclaiming it.
When you select the Release to Responsible Party option, the checkout on
the target object is transferred from the active surrogate to the responsible
party (original user), and the system releases the checkout status from the
surrogate user and reassigns it to the original user.
Transfer Check-Out(s)
Transfers checkout of the target objects from the original user to the active
surrogate when you select the Stand-In option.
5. Click OK.
Teamcenter designates the user as the active surrogate and grants the surrogate
all privileges assigned to the original user. The system indicates that there is
an active surrogate for the task by displaying the surrogate task symbol
the task display.
13-48
My Teamcenter Guide
in
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
System administrators can modify Out of Office Assistant settings for any user.
Group administrators can modify Out of Office Assistant settings for members
of their group.
For more information about resource pools, see Using resource pools.
Note
The Out of Office Assistant does not reassign existing tasks in your
inbox. These tasks must be manually reassigned using the Assign
command on the Actions menu.
If you clear both the start and end dates (in other words, set them to
null), the Out of Office Assistant is turned off.
Select the month in which your absence begins. Click the right-arrow
button to move forward in the calendar. Click the left-arrow button to move
backward in the calendar.
c.
d. Type the hour, minute, and second at which your absence begins in the h,
m, and s boxes.
Use the 24-hour clock format; for example, type 1:30 p.m. as 13 h, 30 m,
and 00 s.
e.
Click OK to accept the date and time and close the calendar.
4. Set the Out of Office Dates absence ending date and time by performing the
following steps:
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-49
Using workflows
Chapter 13
a. Click the calendar button next to the To box to open the popup calendar. The
calendar initially shows the current day, month, and year.
b.
Select the month in which your absence ends. Click the right-arrow button to
move forward in the calendar. Click the left-arrow button to move backward
in the calendar.
c.
d. Type the hour, minute, and second at which your absence ends in the h,
m, and s boxes.
Use the 24-hour clock format; for example, type 1:30 p.m. as 13 h, 30 m,
and 00 s.
Note
e.
If you are unsure of your return date, leave the date blank. Your
assigned tasks are forwarded until you reset your status.
Click OK to accept the date and time and close the calendar.
Note
If you clear both the start and end dates (in other words, set them to
null), the Out of Office Assistant is turned off.
5. Set the New Task Recipient by selecting the group, role and user name of the
person to whom the assigned tasks will be forwarded. If the system indicates the
selected person is out of office, that person cannot be selected as a recipient.
6. Click OK.
13-50
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
System Requirements
Configuration Overview
Chapter 6, Troubleshooting.
Remote inboxes let you interact with workflow tasks that originated at remote sites.
When you have a user account at a remote site, you can subscribe to that site
to access your inbox, called your remote inbox, and access tasks assigned to
you at the remote site.
After you subscribe to your inbox at a remote site, your local site worklist
displays a remote site link you can use to launch a client to let you access the
remote site inbox.
Note
The remote site link also shows the number of tasks in your worklist at
the remote site.
Remote site links in the local site worklist cannot be expanded in the local tree
display.
When you click the link to the remote site, Teamcenter launches a full, separate
Teamcenter session to display the remote inbox.
Note
thin
Displays the remote site in the thin client.
This is the default setting.
rich
Displays the remote site in the rich client.
dynamic
Displays the remote site in the same type of client used to access
the link to the remote site.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-51
Using workflows
Chapter 13
Sites with remote inboxes to which you are already subscribed are listed
as Selected Inboxes.
Sites with remote inboxes to which you are not already subscribed are listed
as Available Inboxes.
Remote Checkout lets you access modifiable replicas of the target data
associated with the tasks assigned to you.
o
When a workflow task requires you to modify data located at a remote site,
use Remote Checkout to check out and send an editable copy of the data
to your local Home location.
This checks out the data at the remote site and puts the data on the local
site in the checked-out state.
When you have completed the data modification, use the standard Check-In
option at the local site to undo the checkout at the remote site, move the
modified data to the remote site.
This checks in the data at the remote site.
Remote Export lets you access read-only replicas of data. If necessary, you can
also use this command to transfer site ownership of the data required to perform
your tasks.
When you subscribe to a remote inbox, your worklist displays a link that
lets you launch a client that accesses the remote site.
2. Select the object to check out from the remote site, and choose ToolsMulti-Site
CollaborationSendRemote Checkout.
The system displays the Remote Checkout dialog box.
13-52
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Change ID
Type the change number associated with the checkout request.
Comments
Type the reason for the checkout request.
Target Site
From the list of available sites, choose the site to which the object should
be sent.
Click Home on the right side of the Target Site box to choose sites from the
list.
OK to remote checkout?
Displays the status of objects being remotely checked out.
4. Click Yes.
The system displays the current options in the Remote Checkout Options
Settings dialog box.
5. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel the checkout operation.
The system displays the status of the checkout operation. The checked-out data
goes to your home folder on the target site.
Export data to your local site from a remote site
1. Start a client that accesses a remote site.
Note
When you subscribe to a remote inbox, your worklist displays a link that
lets you launch a client that accesses the remote site.
2. In the remote site client, select the object to export as a read-only replica.
3. Choose ToolsMulti-Site CollaborationSendRemote Export.
The system displays the Remote Export dialog box.
4. Enter the following information in the dialog box:
Reason
Type the reason for the data export.
Target Sites
From the list of available sites, select the site to which the object should
be sent.
Click Home to the right of the Target Site box to select sites from the list.
OK to remote export?
Displays the status of objects being remotely exported.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-53
Using workflows
Chapter 13
5. Click Yes.
The system displays the current options in the Remote Export Options Settings
dialog box.
6. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel the export operation.
The system displays the status of the export operation. The exported data goes
to your home folder on the target site.
Application labels
System messages
Buttons
For information about working with properties files, see the Client Customization
Programmers Guide.
13-54
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
If there is no audit data for the business object, the view displays a No
message.
process
If the selected object has passed through more than one workflow process, you
can choose which process to display from the list to the right of the tab.
In the Process History view, you can review the progress of a workflow or schedule
and do the following:
PLM00046 I
To add a column, select a property from the Available Properties list and
click the Add to Displayed Columns button .
My Teamcenter Guide
13-55
Using workflows
Chapter 13
You can use the Apply Column Configuration command on the view
menu to:
You can use the Save Column Configuration command on the view
menu to save the current configuration of the table display.
5. Click Close to close the Column Management dialog box.
Process reports
The following audit reports are available when you choose the
ToolsReportsReport Builder Reports menu command in My Teamcenter:
WF - Filtered Audit
Displays the start, complete, approve, and rejected actions for the specified
workflow process. For more detailed information about this set of actions,
including group and role of the performer and assignee information, use Audit
-Workflow Summary Report.
WF - Items In Process
Displays the items currently in a workflow process and where they are in their
respective processes.
13-56
WF - Objects In Process
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Displays the objects currently in a workflow process and where they are in their
respective processes.
WF - Signoffs
Displays the signoff results and comments for the specified object in a workflow
process. For more detailed information, use Audit - Workflow Signoff Report.
WF - Unfiltered Audit
Displays all actions and their statuses for the specified workflow process. For
more detailed information about this set of actions, including group and role of
the performer and assignee information, use Audit - Workflow Detailed Report.
Select Export Selected Objects to export the rows you selected in the view.
Select Export All Visible Columns to export all the columns in the view.
PLM00046 I
For a standard Excel file that is not connected to Teamcenter, select Static
Snapshot.
For an interactive live Excel file that is connected to Teamcenter, select Live
integration with Excel (Interactive).
For a live Excel file that is not connected to Teamcenter, select Live
integration with Excel (Bulk Mode).
My Teamcenter Guide
13-57
Using workflows
Chapter 13
You can accumulate changes and later connect the file to Teamcenter.
To export the data to an Excel file that also contains import processing
information on a separate sheet, select Work Offline and Import.
To check out objects while exporting to live Excel, select Check out objects
before export.
Note
The checkout applies to all objects being exported. Use this option
carefully if you are exporting a large number of rows.
Copy URL is unavailable if you select more than one object to export.
The export file is generated and the URL Generated message is displayed,
confirming that the URL is in your Windows Clipboard and showing the URL
details.
7. Click OK to generate the export Excel file.
Excel opens a temporary file. You can create a permanent file by choosing
FileSave As in Excel to display the Save As dialog box.
If you save a live Excel file, you can open it later in My Teamcenter to reconnect
it to the database.
Note
13-58
My Teamcenter
ADA License
Structure Manager
Multi-Structure Manager
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Schedule Manager
Workflow Viewer
Organization
For more information, see View audit logs in the Summary view.
Run predefined audit reports or create new reports, using the Report Builder
application.
For more information, see My Teamcenter Guide.
PLM00046 I
The Summary view of the following Teamcenter applications shows audit logs
in the Audit logs tab.
o
My Teamcenter
ADA License
Structure Manager
Multi-Structure Manager
Schedule Manager
Workflow Viewer
Organization
My Teamcenter Guide
13-59
Using workflows
Chapter 13
Legacy audit information is only accessible from a button in the Audit Logs tab in
the Summary view when a legacy audit file is present.
The audit logs are grouped in the Summary view as follows:
Log name
Description
Workflow Logs
Structure Logs
Organization Logs
Schedule Logs
General Logs
Process reports
The following audit reports are available when you choose the
ToolsReportsReport Builder Reports menu command in My Teamcenter:
WF - Filtered Audit
Displays the start, complete, approve, and rejected actions for the specified
workflow process. For more detailed information about this set of actions,
including group and role of the performer and assignee information, use Audit
-Workflow Summary Report.
13-60
WF - Items In Process
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
Displays the items currently in a workflow process and where they are in their
respective processes.
WF - Objects In Process
Displays the objects currently in a workflow process and where they are in their
respective processes.
WF - Signoffs
Displays the signoff results and comments for the specified object in a workflow
process. For more detailed information, use Audit - Workflow Signoff Report.
WF - Unfiltered Audit
Displays all actions and their statuses for the specified workflow process. For
more detailed information about this set of actions, including group and role of
the performer and assignee information, use Audit - Workflow Detailed Report.
Ensure that audit definitions exist for the objects for which you have created
saved queries.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-61
Chapter 13
Using workflows
Click Export Selected Objects to export the selected rows in the view.
Select Export All Visible Columns to export all the columns in the view.
Values that you cannot change in Teamcenter are unavailable in the cells
of the live Excel file.
The export to Excel option is not available on UNIX clients.
13-62
If you select an object, the object ID, name, revision, and object type are
displayed in the Search Criteria section.
To select a project, select a project you have access to from the Project list.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Using workflows
If you want to search for a different object, click the Clear button to clear
the existing search criteria and then type the object ID, name, and revision
in the Audit Log dialog box.
3. (Optional) Specify additional search criteria, such as event type, user ID, and
date created.
4. (Optional) Click the Advanced tab and type criteria to construct a query based
on property values.
Note
The Advanced tab does not display any information if there are no
logged properties in the audit definition object.
c.
Select the properties for which you require audit logs from the Available
Properties list, and click the
button to move the property to the Selected
Search Criteria list.
Note
d. To search for properties based on old or new values, in the Selected Search
Criteria list, enter the old value in the Old Value column and the new value
in the New Value column.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
13-63
Chapter 13
Using workflows
e.
Click Find.
Audit logs that match your selected criteria appear.
5. Click Find.
The system displays the audit logs that match the search criteria.
Property value changes are shown in the User Data column of the audit log. The
User Data column shows the property name, the old value of the property, and
the new value of the property.
The old value of the property is the same as the new value of the property if
the property value does not change.
Note
13-64
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
For any selected item assigned to a project, the hierarchy can be followed up to
the top-level folder and can be expanded to display lower levels of the hierarchy,
as configured by the project administrator.
Project data filtering can also be applied in the absence of a project smart folder
hierarchy. You can filter project data based on object type.
For information about defining projects, see the Project and Program Guide.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
14-1
Chapter 14
Team role
Definition
Project Administrator
role in Project
Administration group
Note
Note
Team Administrator
Gordon, Jack
14-2
My Teamcenter Guide
Privileged Team
Members
Jones, Paul
Belcher, Sarah
Team Members
Franklin, Wendy
Tracey, Don
PLM00046 I
Smith, William
The My Projects view is similar to My Teamcenter views but with the following
differences:
The Apply filters dialog box lets you apply filtering based on source
types, properties, and values.
You select a project from the hierarchy to display information in the other My
Projects panes.
Summary
The summary view consists of two tabs:
o
Project Data
Displays the filtered objects assigned to the selected project.
Team
Displays the project team associated with the selected project.
Note
The content of the My Projects view varies when you install Consumer
Packaged Goods.
For more information, see Getting Started with Consumer Packaged Goods.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
14-3
Chapter 14
Filters defined in My Teamcenter cannot be saved for future use. You must add
and remove them as required.
Only one filter criteria can be applied to an abstract smart folder . If multiple
filters are applied to an abstract smart folder, no project data is displayed.
14-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
6. Choose filter criteria by clicking the Source Type, Property, and/or Value cells
and selecting a value from the list.
For example, you can add a filter to display the project data owned by the
Engineering group.
Note
You can remove rows from the filter table by clicking the Remove the
. Click the Clear the filters button
selected filter button
all values from the table.
to remove
The filters you apply remain until you remove them. However, you
cannot save a filter configuration and retrieve it for future use.
Find projects
1. Click Search
on the toolbar or select Advanced from the perform search
menu at the top of the navigation pane.
2. In the Search view, click Select a Search
5. Type the project search criteria in the applicable search form boxes.
6. Click Execute the search
A list of the project or projects that match the search criteria appears in the
Search Results view.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
14-5
Chapter 14
5. Type the project search criteria in the applicable search form boxes.
6. Click Execute the search
A list of the objects assigned to the project or projects that match the search
criteria appears in the Search Results view.
You have a current project set when you create a new Teamcenter workspace
object. To set your current project in My Teamcenter, choose EditUser Settings.
On the object creation wizard Assign to Project page, the Owning Project property
is displayed, but not yet assigned.
14-6
After the item is created, the Owning Project property is populated and can be
seen in the Details view when you add the Owning Project column to the display.
You can use the Assign to Project page to assign the object being created to one
or more projects, but the Assign to Project step is not required for the data
to be assigned to the owning project.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
You can only assign objects to projects if the privilege to do so has been
granted by the project administrator.
After objects have been created, you can assign them to projects by selecting the
objects from a hierarchy tree, a Details table, or the Search Results view.
Note
You can select from different lists of values (LOVs) for a property depending
on which project the object is assigned to.
For more information about selecting different property values from an LOV
based on assigned project, see the Project and Program Guide.
For more information about assigning objects to projects, see Assign objects to
projects from the tree or Details table.
Teamcenter administrators and project administrators can add tor remove multiple
objects for a project by using the update_project_bom utility.
The objects you selected in step 1 may already be assigned to one or more
projects. You can click the My Projects link in the navigation pane to
view your projects and associated data.
3. Select the project or projects to which the objects will be assigned and move
them to the Selected Projects list using the right-arrow button. To select all
projects in the list, click the double-arrow button.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
14-7
Chapter 14
4. Click Apply to assign the objects to the projects and retain the dialog box. Click
OK to assign the projects and exit the dialog box.
14-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
When a related object is cut from the object assigned to the project or program,
the related object is removed from the project or program.
Generally, you propagate secondary items that are related to the primary item by a
Specifications, Manifestations, Attaches, or AltReps relationship. Secondary
items related to primary items by Requirements and References relationships
generally do not need to be implicitly propagated to the project or program.
PLM00046 I
Specification
Manifestation
My Teamcenter Guide
14-9
Chapter 14
AltRep
EC_affected_item_rel
EC_solution_item_rel
For more information about defining propagation rules and configuring assignment
of related (secondary) objects to projects, see the Project and Program Guide.
Item and item revision subtypes, such as engineering changes and documents
Forms
Datasets
For example, Teamcenter can be configured to assign new item revisions to the
current project or program of the user who creates the new item revision.
Note
Your current project or program is defined in the User Settings dialog box.
You can choose EditUser Setting to change your current project or program.
14-10
When there is a conflict between a propagation rule and the execution of the
autoAssignToProject extension, the extension takes precedence over the rule.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
For more information about removing objects from projects, see Remove objects
from projects.
If you select multiple objects in step 1, the system displays the Remove
Objects from Projects dialog box.
If you select a single object, the system displays the Remove an Object from
Projects dialog box.
The projects in which the selected objects are assigned, and in which you are a
privileged member, are displayed in the Projects for Selection list.
3. Select the project or projects from which the objects will be removed and move
them to the Selected Projects list using the right-arrow button.
Note
PLM00046 I
To remove the objects from the projects and retain the dialog box, click Apply.
To remove the projects and exit the dialog box, click OK.
My Teamcenter Guide
14-11
Chapter
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15-4
15-4
15-5
15-5
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
Subscriptions overview
Subscriptions let you receive notification, in near real time using Teamcenter mail,
when data is modified by another user or as the release status of an item revision
changes. You can:
Create subscriptions that notify you when a secondary object, such as a dataset,
is created relative to the primary object, such as the item or item revision.
Teamcenter refers to these changes and additions of secondary objects as events.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
15-1
Chapter 15
A base item revision is released with any release status other than a specified
status.
Subscription object
Event initiated by
Time of event
Site name
Email_Send
Indicates the notification mail is sent.
Email_Not_Send
Indicates the notification mail is not sent.
To access notification mail history. choose the ViewAuditView Audit Logs menu
command to display the Viewing the audit logs dialog box. And then, under Event
Type Name, specify Email_Send or Email_Not_Send to view notification status.
15-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Event types
An event type defines an event whose occurrence on an object can be tracked with a
subscription.
When the event occurs relative to the target object, the subscriber is notified.
The list of available event types displayed during the creation of a subscription
depends on the event types that are mapped to the selected target object type.
o
Note
For information about event types and the Event Type editor, see the
Business Modeler IDE Guide.
Create a subscription
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
15-3
Chapter 15
State
No pending refresh notification.
Pending refresh notification. Indicates that there are objects on the
notification list that have been viewed but have not yet been refreshed.
New refresh notification. Indicates that there are refresh notifications
that have not been reviewed.
15-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
For more information about preferences, see the Preferences and Environment
Variables Reference.
You can configure refresh notification as follows:
Specify the time interval for obtaining refresh notification using the
TC_refresh_notify_pull_time_interval preference.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
15-5
Chapter 15
All users can access the Subscription Manager. Your role determines the level of
functionality that is available. Only system administrators can modify and delete
subscriptions on behalf of another user.
Teamcenter queries the database to retrieve the information that displays in the
Subscription table. You can rearrange the order of columns in the table by clicking
on the column head and moving it to the desired location. You can also print, add,
and remove columns, such as:
Target
Subscriber
Event Type
Expiration Date
Execution Time
Use the lower portion of the pane to enter search criteria. The search criteria is
based on the object, subscriber, event type, expiration date, execution time.
No Expiration Date
Execution Time
Range
Execute
Immediately
5. Click Find.
Modify a subscription
1. Choose ToolsSubscription Manager.
2. Select the row in the table corresponding to the subscription that you want to
modify and click the Modify button.
15-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
4. Click OK.
Delete a subscription
1. Choose ToolsSubscription Manager.
2. Select the row in the table corresponding to the subscription that you want
to delete and click the Delete button.
3. Click Yes to confirm and complete the delete action.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
15-7
Chapter
16 Managing forms
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
16 Managing forms
Captured information is what you type in the boxes within a form. These are
generally required boxes. Business rules may require certain boxes be populated
when the form is created.
Informative information is what you see in read-only boxes in the form. You
cannot modify this information.
Forms contain information about the objects to which they are attached. Companies
typically use forms to:
Capture and store information for work orders, change orders, or change notices.
This is the most common use of forms.
To view a form in the rich client, select the form object and choose the Viewer view.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
16-1
Managing forms
Chapter 16
an ItemRevision Master form object is created automatically. You can enter data
in the item master and item revision master forms when you create an item or by
opening an Item Master or ItemRevision Master form object.
Note
Master forms inherit access privileges from the parent item or item
revision, so if you change access privileges to an item or item revision
you affect the privileges on the master form.
You can use the TC_MASTERFORM_DELEGATE environment
variable to change this default behavior.
For more information, see the Preferences and Environment Variables
Reference.
You create forms in the rich client using one of the following methods:
Choose FileNewItem. When you create an item, at least two form objects are
also created: the item master and item revision master.
Note
16-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing forms
Hyphen characters,-, are not allowed in form names. Naming rules that
control the format of the form name may be in effect at your site. These
rules are managed by your administrator using the Business Modeler
IDE.
For more information, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide.
Create a form from a predefined form type using the legacy dialog box
Note
Hyphen characters, -, are not allowed in form names. Naming rules that
control the format of the form name may be in effect at your site. These
rules are managed by your administrator using the Business Modeler
IDE.
For more information, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide.
PLM00046 I
The form types displayed in this dialog box are controlled by your
administrator. Therefore, it is possible that you may be unable to create
form types that are visible to you in your workspace.
My Teamcenter Guide
16-3
Chapter 16
Managing forms
6. Click OK to save the form in the database and close the dialog box, or click Apply
to save the form in the database and retain the dialog box.
Caution
Note
1. In the My Teamcenter tree, select two forms of the same type to which you have
read access.
Tip
You can select a single form and Teamcenter automatically compares the
selected form with the form associated with the previous item revision, if
one exists.
16-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing forms
The system displays the Form Compare Results dialog box listing the properties
and their values for each form.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
16-5
Chapter
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
For information about adding links to the My Links list, see the Rich Client
Interface Guide.
5. (Optional) Enter a description of the URL in the Description box. The maximum
number of characters allowed for the description is 240.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
17-1
Chapter 17
6. (Optional) Select Open on Create if you want to display the Web page when you
finish creating the URL object.
7. Click OK to create the URL object and exit the dialog box.
The system displays the new URL object within the selected container in the
My Teamcenter tree.
Double-click the object to display the content in the default local browser.
Select the object and choose FileOpen to display the content in the default
local browser.
Select the object and use the Viewer view to display the Web Link object
properties.
Teamcenter automatically opens a Web Browser view to display the Web page
associated with the object.
Note
When a URL link object is selected and the Web page associated with the
object is displayed, you can edit the address in the Viewer view or the Web
Browser to navigate to other Web pages.
17-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
17-3
Chapter
18 Managing collaboration
context objects
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
18 Managing collaboration
context objects
Collaboration and structure objects are data objects, not items. They cannot
be revised, but you can manage them with incremental changes.
Each structure context may include one or more root objects, each of which may be
an occurrence group, an item or an item revision. The item revision may include
objects derived from an item or another item revision. You can attach data objects
to collaboration context and structure context objects.
You can open a collaboration context or a structure context several ways, for
example, by dropping the object on Multi-Structure Manager in the navigation pane.
Within each structure context, you can browse the structure, modify its content, and
create relationships with other structures.
For more information about managing collaboration contexts or structure contexts,
see the Multi-Structure Manager Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
18-1
Chapter 18
No variant rule.
No closure rule.
The structure context may be a composition, depending on the type of context you
select. Items in a composition structure may have relationships to other structures
or to absolute occurrences and occurrence groups.
Note
18-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Teamcenter places the types of structure context you previously created in the
Most Recently Used list.
3. Click Next.
4. Type a name in the Name box.
Mandatory parameters are marked by a red asterisk.
5. (Optional) Type a description of the collaboration context.
6. Choose a configuration context:
a. Click Configuration Context
The system displays the Find Configuration Context by Name dialog box.
b.
Type the name or part of the name of the configuration context in the Name
box.
c.
Click Find.
The system displays the contexts matching the name criteria in the table.
You can also create a structure context with the Multi-Structure Manager
application.
For more information, see the Multi-Structure Manager Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
18-3
Chapter 18
18-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
You can manage the PLM XML file in the same way as any other data object,
including assigning it to a workflow, assigning it a release status and controlling
access privileges with Access Manager.
IDC files contain the configuration of a structure at the time the IDC is created.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
19-1
Chapter 19
3. Type the name and optional description of the intermediate data capture, then
choose the appropriate transfer mode name from the list.
4. Click OK or Apply.
Teamcenter validates the objects you selected. If any of the objects cannot be
captured, The system displays an error message; otherwise, it creates the PLM
XML file containing the IDC.
Edit an IDC
You can edit the content of an IDC at any time, for example, by adding or removing a
root object, or by updating it to a new state.
If you change a file that an IDC references, Teamcenter keeps a copy of the original
file so the integrity of the IDC is maintained.
1. Select an IDC and use the Send To shortcut menu command to select the
Multi-Structure Manager application.
2. Click the Viewer tab.
The viewer shows the state of the captured data and the root object that the IDC
contains. You can then do any of the following:
Click Add State and create a new state from the captured root objects.
Click Remove State and remove a state from the captured root objects.
Click Update State to update the IDC from the currently selected root objects.
19-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
20 Managing manufacturing
documentation
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
20-1
20-2
20-2
20-3
20-3
20-4
20-4
20-6
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
20 Managing manufacturing
documentation
Creating a portfolio
Portfolios act as a container for work instructions or product manuals and supporting
documents, such as a table of contents, cover or trailer pages, and header and footer
information. Portfolios may contain a reference to a publishing page or generic
page or to an embedded generic page. You can use portfolios to store document
structure information, print multiple publishing pages, and export portfolio contents
to HTML or PDF.
You generate portfolios in Manufacturing Process Planner, Part Planner,
Multi-Structure Manager, Service Planner, or Plant Designer. You manage portfolios
in My Teamcenter only.
When managing a portfolio:
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
20-1
Chapter 20
Create generic pages for any information page to add to the portfolio, such as
cover or trailer pages. Generic pages are not considered publishing pages and
Teamcenter does not apply headers and footers to them.
Insert Reference
Select a supporting document for the portfolio to reference.
Create
Add a new supporting document that Teamcenter embeds in the portfolio.
You can only create and embed generic pages.
Embed
Copy a supporting document into the portfolio.
20-2
On the Technical Portfolio toolbar, click the Create table of contents button
.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Date
Long Date
Pages
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
20-3
Chapter 20
Options
Description
General tab
Destination Folder
20-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Tab
Export
Options tab
Options
Description
option to allow users without access to
Teamcenter to view the data.
Replace or remove
logo
Publishing options
Note
Advanced
Options tab
PLM00046 I
Output formats
Provide alternate
format for older
browsers
Display options
My Teamcenter Guide
20-5
Chapter 20
3. Click OK.
The Report Definition wizard displays the status of the export operation.
Note
4. Click Next.
The system displays the Create Report Output dialog box.
5. Create a standard or custom report output format.
You must install PDF creation software in order to create PDF files. If you
are using Visio 2007 SP1, you can install the Microsoft 2007 Save as PDF
add-in, which you can download from:
http://r.office.microsoft.com/r/rlidMSAddinPDFXPS
20-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
PLM00046 I
Select Immediate to initiate the task at the current date and time. Clicking
Finish on any page without previously selecting scheduling parameters also
initiates the task immediately.
Select Periodical to schedule a task that recurs at a specific date and time.
You can specify a recurrence pattern on a daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly
basis.
My Teamcenter Guide
20-7
Chapter 20
20-8
On the Technical Portfolio toolbar, click the Create generic page button
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 21-4
. 21-4
. 21-4
. 21-5
. 21-6
. 21-7
. 21-8
. 21-9
21-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21-11
21-12
21-13
21-13
21-15
21-16
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21-17
21-18
21-19
21-20
21-21
21-22
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21-1
21-2
21-3
21-3
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
Requirements
Teamcenter Systems Engineering provides two types of requirement items,
Requirement and Paragraph. The term requirement is used for both types.
Parametric requirements
Represent the requirements established by the Standards Engineering
organization that conform to the design practices of a program. Parametric
requirements are often maintained in a library for use by all designers.
Teamcenter provides you with features to manage requirements using trace links.
Through trace links, requirements are connected to objects in other Teamcenter
applications, as appropriate for the product design.
Custom notes can be created in the context of another object such as a requirement,
a part, or a manufacturing object such as a process or operation. Notes are used to
capture issues, actions, questions, or other ad hoc types of information.
For more information about managing requirements, see the Systems Engineering
Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
21-1
Chapter 21
You can assign objects to projects or programs only if you are a privileged
team member.
12. (Optional) Select one or more programs from the Projects or Programs for
Selection list and move them to the Selected Project or Program list.
13. (Optional) Click Next or click the Define Options link in the left pane of the
New Item dialog box.
14. (Optional) Select open, display, and checkout options.
15. Click Finish.
21-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
The new requirement specification is created in the current folder and opens in
Systems Engineering.
Create a requirement
1. Open My Teamcenter.
2. Select the requirement specification item revision node under which you want to
create the requirement.
3. Choose FileNewItem.
4. In the New Item dialog box, select the Requirement item type.
5. Click Next.
The system displays the Define basic information for new item pane.
6. Type an item ID, revision ID, and name for the requirement, or click Assign to
automatically generate the item ID and revision identifiers.
Note
Create a paragraph
1. Open My Teamcenter.
2. Select the requirement object under which you want to create the paragraph.
3. Choose FileNewItem.
4. In the New Item dialog box, select the Paragraph item type.
5. Click Next.
The system displays the Define basic information for new item pane.
6. Type an item ID, revision ID, and name for the paragraph, or click Assign to
automatically generate the item ID and revision identifiers.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
21-3
Chapter 21
Only one trace link of a given subtype is allowed between the same two objects in the
same direction. However, in a given direction between two objects, you can create as
many trace links as the number of available trace link subtypes.
Note
For more information about trace links, see the Systems Engineering Guide.
21-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
You must make multiple object selections from only one structure at a
time. You cannot select an object in one structure, and then switch to
another structure and select additional objects.
Defining and complying trace links can exist also between Systems
Engineering objects and subsets in 4th Generation Design. Using the
cross-domain tracing feature, collaborative designers can analyze these
elements for change impact both downstream and upstream.
Only one trace link of a given subtype is allowed between the same two objects
in the same direction.
In either direction between two objects, you can create as many trace links as
the number of available trace link subtypes.
When you create a trace link, you can accept the default subtype, Trace Link.
Or, you can assign a custom subtype, created in the Business Modeler IDE by a
Teamcenter administrator.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
21-5
Chapter 21
Custom subtypes let you create two or more trace links between the same objects
in the same direction, if you assign a different subtype to each trace link.
For example, a trace link from defining requirement A to complying requirement
B has the Trace Link subtype.
A second defining trace link, with the custom subtype S, can be created from
requirement A to complying requirement B.
Trace links of the same subtype are allowed in both directions between the same
objects. For example:
Defining requirement A is linked to complying requirement B, with the Trace
Link subtype assigned to the trace link.
You can create a trace link of the same subtype to link requirement B, as the
defining object, back to requirement A as the complying object, completing
circular trace links.
You cannot enable in-context mode for a structure line that has no
children.
For more information about enabling in-context mode, see the Manufacturing
Process Planner Guide.
2. Select the source object, or select multiple objects by using the standard
Windows functions.
Note
If you select only one source object, you can create trace links to multiple
target objects. If you select multiple source objects, you can create trace
links to only one target object.
3. Choose ToolsTrace LinkStart Trace Link, click the Start Trace Link
Creation button
on the toolbar, or right-click the selection and choose Trace
LinkStart Trace Link.
4. Select the target object, or select multiple objects by using the standard Windows
functions.
Note
If you select only one source object, you can create trace links to multiple
target objects. If you select multiple source objects, you can create trace
links to only one target object.
5. Specify the trace link subtype and name by doing one of the following:
21-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
a. Choose ToolsTrace LinkEnd Trace Link..., click the End Trace Link
Creation with Subtype button
on the toolbar, or right-click the
selection and choose Trace LinkEnd Trace Link....
The Create Trace Link dialog box appears.
b.
In the list of subtypes on the left, select the subtype to assign to each
trace link.
c.
In the Name box, type the name to assign to each trace link.
You can view the defining and complying path for trace linked objects in the
Traceability view or by generating a traceability report.
For more information about viewing trace links in the Traceability view, see
Systems Engineering Guide or Run a traceability report.
In the Traceability view, you can view the direct and indirect predecessors or
successors in an upstream or downstream path. You can also view the trace
links themselves, as separate objects.
PLM00046 I
The Traceability Matrix view displays the assignments between two selected
structures.
My Teamcenter Guide
21-7
Chapter 21
Run an accountability check to compare two structures to ensure all lines in the
source structure are consumed in the target structure.
For example, you can compare a requirement structure against a product
structure, or compare a requirement structure against a manufacturing process
structure.
In the Teamcenter Relation Browser view, you can view the trace link
hierarchies in a requirement structure.
For more information about using the Relation Browser view, see the Rich Client
Interface Guide.
Tip
Note
21-8
The report shows the defining and complying objects for the trace links
related to the selected objects.
The report also includes a column showing the context for the defining and
complying occurrence objects, if applicable.
If any trace links exist on the parent item to the selected workspace or
occurrence objects, or on revisions of the workspace or occurrence objects,
those objects and the associated trace link symbols are included in the report.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
For a standard Excel file that is not connected to Teamcenter, click Static
Snapshot.
For an interactive live Excel file that is connected to Teamcenter, click Live
integration with Excel (Interactive).
For a live Excel file that is not connected to Teamcenter, click Live integration
with Excel (Bulk Mode).
You can accumulate changes and later connect the file to Teamcenter.
To export the data to an Excel file that also contains import processing
information on a separate sheet, click Work Offline and Import.
To check out objects while exporting to live Excel, select Check out objects
before export.
Note
The checkout applies to all objects being exported. Use this option
carefully if you are exporting a large set of objects or perhaps an
entire product structure.
For information about managing and creating Excel export templates, see the
Systems Engineering Guide.
4. Click Copy URL.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
21-9
Chapter 21
Note
Copy URL is unavailable if you select more than one object to export.
Note
Caution
The constant setting prevents deletion of trace links to the released object
revision, it does not prevent deletion of trace links to occurrences of the
object. Therefore, you can still delete trace links on object occurrences
in the baseline structure.
For more information about setting the Fnd0PreventTraceLinkDelete
business object constant, see the Business Modeler IDE Guide.
Note
When deleting a trace link on an occurrence object, you must consider the
context of the occurrence.
Tip
You can use the following procedure to delete trace links from one or more
workspace or occurrence objects at a time.
21-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
If trace link symbols are not removed from the primary view, you can refresh
the symbol display by doing either of the following:
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
21-11
Chapter 21
the primary object and the custom note or custom note revision is the secondary
object.
The text for custom note data is specified in the Body Text property of the note
revision. You use MS Word to create and edit the content of a custom note.
Custom notes are attached directly to an object, and not underlying occurrences.
on the toolbar.
You can also choose FileNewItem to create the object using the New
Item dialog box.
You must type a name for the custom note in the Name box. If you leave
the Requirement ID and Revision boxes blank, the values are filled in
automatically when you click Finish to create the custom note.
21-12
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
If the note is not visible under the item or item revision, you must specify
Complying Objects as a shown relation for the item and item revision.
1. Choose EditOptions.
2. Expand the Options tree and expand the General folder.
3. Click the Item or Item Revision node.
4. In the General options tab, choose Complying Objects from the
Available Relations list.
5. Click
6. Click OK.
7. Choose ViewRefresh or ViewRefresh Window to refresh the display.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
21-13
Chapter 21
Plain text
format
c.
d. Click Yes.
The Edit Properties dialog box appears.
e.
f.
Scroll to the Text box and type the custom note. For
example:
Verify axel tolerance using company standard test methods.
g.
h. Click Yes.
The custom note is checked in and the new text appears
in Body Cleartext property displayed on the Overview
tab in the Summary view.
21-14
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Rich text
format
b.
c.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
21-15
Chapter 21
Dont Copy
Allows you to selectively copy objects from one revision to
another. Objects that are designated as Dont Copy appear
with a line through them in the Destination tree.
Copy as Object
Creates a new object of the same type and relation to the
parent object. Objects created by this method are totally
independent of the parent object. Therefore, any changes to
the copied object are not reflected in the original object.
Copied objects appear in bold in the Destination tree and
can be renamed.
Copy as Reference
Copies the object as a reference to the original object. All
changes to the reference copy affect the original object. The
names of attachments that are copied as references cannot
be modified.
9. Click Next.
The Select projects or programs that you want to assign new object to pane
is displayed.
10. (Optional) Assign the new revision to a different project or program.
11. Click Next.
The Select open option and alternate id display option pane is displayed.
12. (Optional) Set the open, display, or checkout option for the new revision.
13. Click Finish.
The new revision is created as a copy of the previous revision object. The new
revision is independent of the source revision. Modifications to the new revision
are not reflected in the source revision, which allows you to edit the note text
for each revision.
This procedure removes the custom note object from the Teamcenter
database. If you want to remove the custom note from the view, use the Cut
command instead of Delete.
1. Select the custom note or custom note revision object you want to delete.
2. Choose EditDelete or click the Delete button on the toolbar or press the Delete
key.
Teamcenter displays a request for confirmation.
3. Click Yes.
21-16
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
The standard rules for deleting an item or item revision apply to deleting a
custom note or custom note revision.
The parameters for the requirement are specified in the Body Text property
of the requirement revision.
Note
The text of the requirement revision contains text, parameters, and applicable
values using the syntax shown below.
text [parameter name: parametric value1 delimiter parametric
value2 delimiter... parametric value n]
Example
The default delimiter for parameters in the requirement text is a comma (,).
However, your Teamcenter administrator can configure the delimiter to use
a different character.
PLM00046 I
You cannot delete the dataset or detach the dataset from the parametric
requirement revision.
My Teamcenter Guide
21-17
Chapter 21
1. Choose FileNewItem.
The New Item dialog box appears.
2. In the New Item dialog box, select the Parametric Requirement item type.
3. Click Next.
The system displays the Define basic information for new item pane.
4. Type an item ID, revision ID, and name for the standard note, or click Assign to
automatically generate the item ID and revision identifiers.
Note
21-18
My Teamcenter Guide
You can assign objects to projects or programs only if you are a privileged
team member.
PLM00046 I
11. (Optional) Select one or more programs from the Projects or Programs for
Selection list and move them to the Selected Project or Program list.
12. (Optional) Click Next or click the Define Options link in the left pane of the
New Item dialog box.
13. (Optional) Select open, display, and checkout options.
14. Click Finish.
The new parametric requirement is created in the current folder.
You can double-click the new parametric requirement item to open it in Systems
Engineering and display the new parametric requirement as the root structure.
To specify parametric requirement text, you must have DBA privileges with
administrative bypass set, or you must fill a role that your Teamcenter
administrator has designated as having parametric requirement definition
privileges.
1. Open My Teamcenter.
2. Right-click the parametric requirement revision and choose Properties.
Alternatively, select the parametric requirement revision and choose
ViewProperties.
Note
You cannot double-click the text dataset to open it. Although the
requirement text is stored in the dataset, you must enter the data in the
parametric requirement revision properties.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
21-19
Chapter 21
Note
9. Click Save.
Note
You cannot modify the text after it has been saved. To update parameters,
you must create a new revision of the parametric requirement.
You do not need DBA privileges or special role access to attach a parametric
requirement to an item or item revision.
1. Open My Teamcenter.
2. Right-click the parametric requirement or the parametric requirement revision
that you want to attach and choose Copy. Alternatively, select the parametric
requirement and choose EditCopy.
3. Select the destination item or item revision and choose EditAttach
Requirements/NotesParametric Requirement.
The Input Parametric Values dialog box displays the parameters and values
defined for the requirement.
4. Choose values for the parameters.
5. Click OK.
The parametric requirement revision is attached to the selected object (item or
item revision) through the Parametric Requirements Lists relation.
Note
If the requirement is not visible under the item or item revision to which it is
attached, you must specify Parametric Requirements Lists as a shown
relation for the item and item revision. To do this:
1. Choose EditOptions.
2. Expand the Options tree and expand the General folder.
3. Click the Item or Item Revision node.
4. In the General options tab, choose Parametric Requirements Lists from
the Available Relations list.
5. Click
6. Click OK.
21-20
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
21-21
Chapter 21
21-22
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
22 Managing schedules
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
22 Managing schedules
2. Choose Schedule in the right pane and click Next to display the following figure.
a. In the Schedule Information section, enter a value for Schedule ID, Revision
ID, and Name.
Optionally, enter a value for Name, and then click Assign to have Schedule
Manager enter values for Schedule ID and Revision ID.
b.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
22-1
Chapter 22
Managing schedules
(Optional) If you selected the Use an existing Schedule template for this
new Schedule check box, you can also select the Background Copy check
box to create the schedule in the background to increase system performance.
c.
If you selected the Use an existing Schedule template for this new Schedule
check box, click the Template button to select the schedule template.
Teamcenter displays the Choose a Schedule Template dialog box.
Select a schedule template or master schedule template from the list and
click Select.
22-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing schedules
Note
d. (Optional) If you selected the Use an existing Schedule template for this
new Schedule check box, you can change the start date of the new schedule
from the template start date by clicking the Shift Date calendar button.
e.
f.
The Time Zone section contains the default time zone. Click the arrow to
display a list of values.
g.
Click the Start Date calendar and select the start date and time for the
schedule calendar. You can set the date, hour, and minutes. If you base your
schedule on the start date, you create your tasks from the start date forward.
Click the Finish Date calendar and select the finish date and time for the
schedule calendar. You can set the date, hour, and minutes. If you create
your schedule on the finish date, you build your tasks from the finish date
backward.
Note
All tasks and milestones for the schedule must fall within the start
and finish dates. After the schedule is created, you can change the
start and finish dates using the Properties dialog box.
For more information about the schedule calendar, see the Schedule
Manager Guide.
h. In the Schedule Options section, you can select the following check boxes:
Is Schedule Template
Specifies this schedule is a schedule template. Schedule templates are
used as a basis for other schedules.
For more information about creating schedule templates, see the
Schedule Manager Guide.
Published
Specifies this schedule is published. Published schedules allow other
users access to the schedule. By default, this option is selected.
Only the owner of the schedule can publish or unpublish a schedule at
any time using the Schedule Properties dialog box. To deny access to
the schedule to other users, keep it unpublished. Publish it when you are
ready for others to view or edit it.
Note
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
22-3
Chapter 22
Managing schedules
To unpublish a schedule:
A. Right-click the schedule in Schedule Manager and choose
EditProperties.
B. In the Properties dialog box, locate the Published option and select
False.
C. Click Save.
To publish a schedule, perform these same steps but change the
Published option to True.
22-4
My Teamcenter Guide
Is Schedule Public
PLM00046 I
Managing schedules
Is Percent Linked
If you select this option, the following rules apply:
o
For more information about using the WBS Format Define Format
button, see the Schedule Manager Guide.
4. Click Finish.
5. Teamcenter displays the Load Schedule dialog box.
Schedule Manager creates the new schedule and it appears under the folder that
was selected when you chose FileNewSchedule. You can move the schedule
from the current folder to another folder.
Note
Delete a schedule
Deleting a schedule deletes all tasks, dependencies, costs, and resource assignments
in that schedule.
1. In My Teamcenter, select the schedule to delete.
Note
2. Choose EditDelete.
3. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
22-5
Managing schedules
Chapter 22
The person who creates a schedule can always view the schedule.
A person who is member of the schedule only views the schedule if the
Published schedule option is set.
A person who is not a member of the schedule only views the schedule if the
Published and Public schedule options are set.
22-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing schedules
At minimum, you must enter a Schedule Name. However, wild cards are
permitted. To display all schedules, enter an asterisk (*) in the Schedule Name
box.
Schedule Manager displays the Properties dialog box with the following
options:
Caution
5. Click OK.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
22-7
Chapter 22
Managing schedules
In Progress
Late
Needs Attention
Note
Note
You can only update execution data from this view. You can use this view
anywhere in the rich client where you can select a schedule task.
Set the SM_EXEC_VIEW_PROPERTIES preference to specify the
properties displayed in the execution view and the order in which they
are displayed.
For more information about this preference, see the Preferences and
Environment Variables Reference.
22-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing schedules
If you search by *scheduling*, you do not get the last preference listed
in the table: TC_current_role.
Description
scheduling_graph_dataSource
scheduling_graph_dataSource_filter
none
No filter applied (default)
selection
Filter for selected schedules
current
Filter for the current schedule
scheduling_graph_date_format
scheduling_graph_domain_interval
scheduling_graph_domain_label_vertical
scheduling_graph_font_name
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
22-9
Chapter 22
Managing schedules
Preference
Description
scheduling_graph_font_size
scheduling_graph_font_style
scheduling_graph_task_legend
scheduling_graph_view
TC_current_role
22-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing schedules
c.
B. Select columns in the Available Columns list and click > to copy them to
the Displayed Columns list.
C. To remove columns in the Displayed Columns list, select the columns
and click <. To remove all columns, click <<.
D. Click Apply after you specify the columns to display in the program view.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
22-11
Managing schedules
Chapter 22
Click Next.
To remove schedules from the Selected Schedules list, select the schedules
and click <. To remove all schedules, click <<.
You can also use the Search box to search for a particular schedule.
b.
Click Next.
c.
Select a value from the Condition box, for example, Less than, Greater
Than, Equal To, Between.
Note
e.
Click OK.
Set the ProgramViewFilterProperties preference to specify the list of
attributes for schedule and schedule task objects displayed in the New
Program View wizard Filter dialog box in Schedule Manager.
f.
Click Next.
22-12
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Managing schedules
This is the only time you can select the Schedules option. Because of the
system hierarchy, it must be selected as the highest grouping or not at all.
If you select a grouping condition, summary tasks are removed from the
Gantt chart.
b.
To group date, time, and numerical columns by range, click the Range button
to the right of the corresponding Field Name box.
The Select Range dialog box appears. The From and To input boxes for this
dialog box vary depending on the type of box selected.
A. Enter values in the From and To boxes.
For dates, use the Calendar boxes to select From and To dates.
B. Repeat the process to add additional ranges.
C. Click Done.
Note
c.
d. Under Cell background, select a background color for this grouping level.
A. Click the Cell background button that corresponds to the group.
B. When the Pick A Color dialog box appears, select a display color that you
want to represent for this group node in the program view.
C. Click OK.
e.
E. Click Done.
f.
PLM00046 I
In the first Then By row under Field Name, select another attribute by which
you want to group information.
My Teamcenter Guide
22-13
Managing schedules
Chapter 22
Repeat the process for the remaining attributes you want to group.
Note
To delete a group by selection, select the blank from the list. If you
delete a group by selection, all groups under the one you delete are
also deleted.
You may not have to complete this step if the Open on Create check
box is selected.
22-14
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
23 Producing reports
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
23 Producing reports
Validation Manager result reports are available to help you ensure data conforms
to requirements.
For more information about validation functionality, see Running validations.
Trace link traceability reports let you display defining and complying
relationships for an object.
For information about traceability reports, see Tracing downstream and
upstream paths.
A search compare report lets you compare search results to the results of other
searches or to the contents of your Home, My Worklist, or Newstuff containers.
For more information about search compare reports, see the Rich Client Interface
Guide.
When you import Teamcenter objects you can generate a variety of reports.
For more information about import reports, see Import a Teamcenter object.
When you work with embedded software, you can generate hardware and
software compatibility reports for electronic control units.
For more information about hardware and software compatibility reports, see
the Embedded Software Solutions Guide.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
23-1
Producing reports
Chapter 23
which provides report definitions for cross schedule tasking, baseline, and
overview data, let you generate Report Builder reports that can be formatted
using style sheets and that can reflect data in the context of one or more selected
items.
Note
For information about creating and managing Report Builder reports, see the
Report Builder Guide.
For more information about Schedule Manager reports, see the Schedule
Manager Guide.
For information about creating and managing Report Generator reports, see
the Report Generator Guide.
Generate Report
Creates item reports generated in the context of one or more selected objects.
Item reports generate in multiple output formats and follow PLM XML
standards allowing integration with third-party reporting tools.
For more information about generating reports for an item, see Generate an item
report on a Teamcenter object.
23-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Producing reports
Note
4. Click Next.
5. Fill in criteria for the query. Only the objects that match the query are placed
into the report.
To select the display locale, select the locale from the Report Display Locale
list.
If you want to choose the format for the report, click the arrow in the Report
Stylesheet box to select a stylesheet.
If you want to save the report as a file, select Create Dataset and type a
name in the Dataset Name box.
6. Click Finish.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
23-3
Chapter 23
Producing reports
If you did not choose a style sheet, the report is displayed in your default XML
application. If you chose an HTML spreadsheet, the report is displayed in a
Web browser.
If you saved the report as a dataset, the report file is saved in your default Home
folder, for example, Newstuff.
2. Select a report.
Note
3. Click Next.
4. Fill in criteria for the query. Only the objects that match the query are placed
into the report.
5. If you want to choose the format for the report, click the arrow in the Report
Stylesheet box to select a style sheet.
23-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Producing reports
6. If you want to save the report as a file, select Create Dataset and type a name in
the Dataset Name box.
7. Click Finish.
If you did not choose a style sheet, the report is displayed in your default XML
application. If you chose an HTML spreadsheet, the report is displayed in a
Web browser.
If you saved the report as dataset, the report is saved in your default Home
folder, for example, Newstuff.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
23-5
Chapter
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24-1
24-2
24-3
24-3
24-3
24-3
24-4
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
24-1
Chapter 24
After aligning the structures, you publish the occurrence data. You publish
occurrence data between source and destination absolute occurrences of two
representations. Teamcenter takes a snapshot of the source occurrence data and
creates a publish link to the destination occurrence. For example, you can publish
transform and shape information from a source design occurrence to a destination
part occurrence. If the source occurrence data is already published, Teamcenter
updates the snapshot with the new information.
A publish link may associate a source design occurrence with more than one target
part occurrence. For simplicity, the following procedures assume you are working
with a single target part occurrence, but multiple targets are permitted depending
on your product structure.
Before aligning items, ensure that master forms are attached to all item
and item revision business objects. Otherwise, the alignment process
may be unsuccessful.
Caution
Note
You create and view associations in My Teamcenter. You can also publish links in
Multi-Structure Manager.
For more details about publishing links in Multi-Structure Manager, see the
Multi-Structure Manager Guide.
For conceptual information about aligning designs and parts in structures, see
Getting Started with Product Structure.
Drag the design revision onto the Representations folder of the part revision.
Copy the design revision and paste it onto the Representations folder of the
part revision.
Copy the design revision, select the Represented By relation of part revision,
and choose Paste Special.
Similarly, each design revision has a Representation For folder attached to it that
may contain part revisions. You can only view the contents of this folder; you cannot
paste a part revision into it to create an association.
24-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Note
When you revise a part, you can decide whether to carry forward associations
with design revisions in the Define Attached Objects pane in the Revise
wizard. By default, associations are carried forward; that is, the design
revisions in the Is Represented By relation, but you can edit the
association during the revision process.
Conversely, when you revise a design, the associations with part revisions
are not carried forward by default. You can change this behavior by adding
the TC_Is_Represented_By,Part Revision,LookLeft string to the
AutoCopyRel business constant. If the design is associated with multiple
revisions, only the latest mature revision is carried forward.
Your business processes determine whether a design revision is considered
mature.
For information about design maturity, see Getting Started with Product
Structure.
Cut the design revision from the Representations folder of the part revision.
Note
To view the properties of a part revision, select the part revision in the
Representation For folder of the design revision and choose ViewProperties.
To view the properties of all part revisions in the Representation For folder,
select the folder itself and choose ViewProperties.
Tip
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
24-3
Chapter 24
Select the part revision and click the Viewer tab. The viewer pane shows an
image of the primary design revision associated with the part revision.
Note
24-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Chapter
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Chapter
The system displays all defined item element types except those specified
for exclusion by the GDE_exclude_list preference.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
25-1
Chapter 25
It may be necessary to resize the dialog box to view the Assign button.
25-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
For more information about alternate identifiers, see Overview of alternate and
alias identifiers.
13. (Optional) Assign the connection to a project, as follows:
a. In the Steps list, click the Assign to Projects link.
The system displays the project selection pane.
b.
Choose one or more projects from the Projects for Selection list, and use the
arrow buttons to move them to the Selected Projects list.
Select the Open on Create check box to open the connection once it is created.
Create a signal
1. Select a containing object for the signal.
2. Choose FileNewSignal.
The system displays the New Signal dialog box.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
25-3
Chapter 25
5. Enter a signal ID, revision, and name, or click Assign to automatically generate
the signal ID and revision identifiers. The Assign button is available if naming
rules and automatic generation are implemented for the selected object type.
It may be necessary to resize the dialog box to view the Assign button.
Tip
Choose one or more projects from the Projects for Selection list, and use the
arrow buttons to move them to the Selected Projects list.
25-4
Check the Open on Create check box to open the signal once it is created.
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
25-5
Appendix
PLM00046 I
Glossary
My Teamcenter Guide
Appendix
Glossary
A
access control entry (ACE)
In Access Manager, each pairing in the access control list of an accessor with the
granted privileges.
access control list (ACL)
Access Manager component that contains a list of accessors and, for each accessor,
the privileges granted, denied, and not set.
Access Manager (AM)
Teamcenter application that enables the system administrator to grant users access
to Teamcenter objects.
accessor
Access Manager component that grants or denies privileges to clusters of users who
share certain common traits (for example, perform the same function or work on
the same project).
ACE
See access control entry (ACE).
ACL
See access control list (ACL).
action handler
Handler used to extend and customize workflow task actions. Action handlers
perform such actions as displaying information, retrieving the results of previous
tasks (inherit), notifying users, setting object protections, and launching applications.
See also task handler.
add status task
Task template that creates and adds a release status to the target objects of a
workflow process. There is no dialog box associated with this template.
ad hoc process modification
Functionality that allows users to add tasks to, or delete tasks from, an active
workflow process.
alias ID
Identifier of a part that is similar to the current part. You can use it as a substitute
part in the product structure. Contrast with alternate ID.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
A-1
Glossary
Appendix A
alternate ID
Different identifier for the current part, but one that represents the same part.
Different organizations and suppliers can have their own part numbers. With
alternate IDs, you are able to find the part you are looking for using your naming
scheme. Contrast with alias ID.
AM
See Access Manager (AM).
AP212
See STEP AP212.
application
Related functional elements collected and arranged in a software package, designed
to accomplish specified tasks. See also perspective.
Application Interface Viewer
Viewer data tab in applications that allows users to monitor and control PLM
XML data exchanges between Teamcenter and another application through a
collaboration context.
approver
User who has a signoff in a workflow process regardless of role and group
membership. In Access Manager, the approver accessor is used to allocate privileges
that apply to all signoffs (for example, read access). See also RIG approver, role
approver, and group approver.
assembly
Compound object that is assembled from other objects and may add additional
information to their interpretation.
attribute
Named storage variable that describes an object and is stored with the object. Users
can search the database for objects using object attributes.
In an object, an attribute is a name/value pair; in the database, an attribute is a field.
B
bid package
Contains line items supplied to vendors to submit quotes.
bid package line item
Part of a bid package; contains an assembly or part with specific context rules.
BOM view
Teamcenter object used to manage product structure information for an item.
A-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Glossary
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
A-3
Glossary
Appendix A
hierarchy or a specific role within the hierarchy, for entire groups of users, and for
users who are assigned a role within a group. It also allows suppressing the display
of specific commands on a designated menu or the display of entire menus.
CommercialPart
Business object type related to a Part object type by a structure relation. A
commercial part is made externally by a vendor who resells, builds, or designs and
builds the part for the OEM (original equipment manufacturer). Commercial parts
may be off-the-shelf market parts or custom-designed parts. A commercial part is
a part whose form, fit, and function may be satisfied by one or more vendor parts
that the OEM may source from one or more vendors.
component
configuration rule
Rule that configures a structure. There are two kinds of configuration rules: revision
rule and variant rule.
connection
Object that defines the connectivity between two or more terminals in a physical
model.
container object
Any Teamcenter object used to hold other objects and organize product information.
For example, folders and items are container objects.
Content Management
Teamcenter application that enables users to manage SGML and XML information
stored in a Teamcenter database and publish documents in multiple formats
using SGML/XML editing and publishing tools. Content Management is used to
collect and publish content, storing the content as components that can be reused
in multiple publications, while links are maintained between components. The
application includes processes for structuring publications so that they can be stored,
published, and used for different purposes. Content Management also stores and
manages graphics for use in publications, provides content revision control, and can
incorporate Teamcenter workflows to facilitate the content development process.
D
dataset
Teamcenter workspace object used to manage data files created by other software
applications. Each dataset can manage multiple operating system files, and each
dataset references a dataset tool object and a dataset business object.
dataset business object
Teamcenter object that contains a list of tools that can operate on a dataset.
dataset tool
Teamcenter object that is the tool used to create or modify a dataset.
A-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Glossary
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
A-5
Glossary
Appendix A
FMS file caching enables placing the data close to the user, while maintaining a
central file volume and database store.
A-6
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Glossary
FSC
See FMS server cache (FSC).
FSC configuration file
File that configures an individual FMS server cache (fsc.xml). The FSC
configuration file defines such values as the address of the master FSC, the
maximum sizes of the segment file caches, and the upload time-out value. It can also
define default values for FCCs and other FSCs.
FSC group
Group of server caches defined in the FMS master configuration file.
G
GDE
See generic design element.
generic design element
BOM item that cannot have different revisions. See also feature.
group (Organization)
Organizational grouping of users at a site. Users can belong to multiple groups
and must be assigned to a default group.
group administrator
User with special maintenance privileges for a group.
group approver
User who is a signoff in a workflow process with a specific group of users. In Access
Manager, the group approver accessor is used in Workflow ACLs and matches the
signoff definition (that is, group) for the release level associated with the Workflow
ACL. The group approver accessor ensures that only signoffs are given privileges, not
a user who matches the group. See also approver, RIG approver, and role approver.
group preference
Teamcenter preference applying to an entire group.
H
harness
Assembly of insulated conductors formed to a predetermined pattern or
configuration; also called a wiring harness.
I
item
Workspace object generally used to represent a product, part, or component. Items
can contain other workspace objects including other items and object folders.
item relation
Description of an association between a Teamcenter item and a piece of information
that describes or is related to the item.
item revision
Workspace object generally used to manage revisions to items.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
A-7
Glossary
Appendix A
A-8
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Glossary
from their original database and importing them into the requesting database.
Configuration of Multi-Site Collaboration is optional.
N
named ACL
Named group of access controls. See also access control list (ACL).
named reference
File types that are managed by a dataset. Datasets are the only workspace objects
that use named references.
naming rule
Business rule that defines the naming conventions for the string property value in
different type objects. Naming rules can be attached to the following properties:
navigation pane
Rich client framework component that displays buttons of the applications available
for use in the rich client. Clicking the application button launches the application.
O
object-based protection
Use of access control lists to create exceptions to rules-based protection on an
object-by-object basis. Object access control lists are most useful for either granting
wider access or limiting access to a specific object.
object chooser
Displays objects appropriate for linking with another Teamcenter product. In
determining the objects to display, the object chooser considers the security rights of
the person accessing the Teamcenter product. See also remote workflow.
object directory services server
Multi-Site Collaboration network node that runs a daemon process to handle
publication of data objects within a Multi-Site Collaboration environment. One
ODS server node must be designated for each object directory services site and each
server node can act only for one object directory services site.
object directory services site
Site with the database that maintains a record of each object in a Multi-Site
Collaboration network. At least one Teamcenter database on a Multi-Site
Collaboration network must be designated as an ODS site. This site is used to store
publication records for the data objects.
object launcher
Launches another Teamcenter product from a linked object. Each Teamcenter
product has an object launcher. See also remote workflow.
ODS server
See object directory services server.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
A-9
Glossary
Appendix A
ODS site
See object directory services site.
Organization
Teamcenter application that enables a system administrator to create and manage
critical Teamcenter files and database entries. It is the point of access for creating a
companys virtual organization and for performing system administration activities
such as volume creation, maintenance, and site administration. Organization
enables creation and management of person, user, role, and group definitions;
definition of the hierarchical structure of the Teamcenter organization; management
of data volumes; and establishment and maintenance of Teamcenter sites.
owner
User that owns an object, initially the user who created it. Ownership can be
transferred from the owner to another user. An object owner usually has privileges
that are not granted to other users (for example, the privilege to delete the object).
owning group
Group that owns an object, usually the group of the user creating the object. Because
users commonly share data with other members of a group, additional privileges may
be granted to the owning group (for example, the privilege to write to the object).
owning site
Multi-Site Collaboration site where the master object resides. The owning site is the
only site where the object can be modified.
P
part
Business object type that can participate in a structure as an assembly or component,
with or without attached datasets. In Teamcenter, a business item managed in a
companys part releasing system. Typically, the assembly or component is designed
and built by the OEM.
persistent object manager (POM)
Interface between Teamcenter objects and the Relational Database Management
System (RDBMS). The persistent object manager provides definition of classes
by inheritance from other classes and definition of attributes, manipulation of
in-memory objects and support for their saving and retrieval to and from the
underlying RDBMS, support for applications accessing the same data concurrently,
protection against the deletion of data used by more than one application, and
support for the access control lists attributed to objects.
person
Definition containing real-world information about each Teamcenter user, such as
name, address, and telephone number. Person definitions are stored as simple text
strings so that they can be easily changed and updated. The name must be unique.
perspective
Container in the rich client user interface for a set of views and editors collected to
accomplish specified tasks. See also view.
PLM XML
Siemens PLM Software format for facilitating product life cycle interoperability
using XML. PLM XML is open and based on standard W3C XML schemas.
A-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Glossary
Representing a variety of product data both explicitly and via references, PLM
XML provides a lightweight, extensible, and flexible mechanism for transporting
high-content product data over the Internet.
preference
Configuration variable stored in a Teamcenter database and read when a Teamcenter
session is initiated. Preferences allow administrators and users to configure many
aspects of a session, such as user logon names and the columns displayed by default
in a properties table.
preference protection scope
Hierarchical range for which a Teamcenter preference can be set. The protection
scope of a hierarchical preference can be site, group, role, or user.
privileged team member
Project team member with privileges to assign and remove objects from that
project. Compare with project team member.
process assignment list
Distribution list associated with a workflow process template, allowing users to
assign resources for all tasks in a process from a single dialog box.
process structure
Hierarchy of manufacturing processes and operations with a sequenced relationship
that together describe how a related product is manufactured. Compare with
product structure.
process template
Blueprint of a workflow process defined by placing workflow and/or change
management tasks (for example, do, perform signoff, route, and checklist) in the
required order of performance. Additional process requirements, such as quorums
and duration times are defined in the template using workflow handlers.
product structure
Hierarchy of assembly parts and component parts with a geometric relationship
between them, for example, a bill of materials (BOM). Variant and revision rules
define the generic BOM. This BOM can then be loaded to display the configured
variant.
product view
Saved configuration of the assembly viewer, including the selection of objects, zoom
factor, rotation angle, and pan displacements.
project
Basis for identifying a group of objects available to multiple organizations, such as
project teams, development teams, suppliers, and customers for a particular piece
of work.
Project administrator
Teamcenter super user with unrestricted access to administer projects they create
using the Project application. A Project administrator creates, modifies, and deletes
project information and team members.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
A-11
Glossary
Appendix A
A-12
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Glossary
relation
Description of an association between a Teamcenter object and a piece of information
that describes or is related to the object.
release status
Status associated with a workspace object when it is released through a workflow
process.
remote workflow
Teamcenter component that enables users to create links between Teamcenter
objects and objects in other Teamcenter products, such as Teamcenter portfolio,
program and project management. Users can then launch the linked Teamcenter
product from within either the rich client or the thin client.
render
Process that invokes the data translations specified for an item, such as a document
revision, to generate derived visualization data. Translate is an action on a dataset.
Render is an action taken on an object, such as a document. See also translate.
replicated object
Copy of master object residing at sites within a Multi-Site Collaboration network.
See also master object.
review task
Task template that includes the select-signoff-team and perform-signoffs subtasks.
Each subtask contains a unique dialog box for executing the process.
revision filter
Filter used to configure the display of items and item revisions based on established
revision rules.
revision rule
Parameter set by the user that determines which revision of an item is used to
configure product context.
rich client
Java-based user interface to Teamcenter installed on user workstations. The rich
client accesses Teamcenter databases using a remote or local server. Compare to
thin client.
RIG approver
User who is a signoff in a workflow process with a specified role and group. In
Access Manager, the RIG approver accessor is used in Workflow ACLs and matches
the signoff definition (that is, role in group) for the release level associated with
the Workflow ACL. This accessor ensures that only signoffs are given privileges,
not a user who matches the role in group. See also approver, group approver, and
role approver.
role
Function-oriented cluster of users that models skills and/or responsibilities. The
same roles are typically found in many groups. In Access Manager, role is an accessor
used to grant privileges to all users with the same skills and/or responsibilities
regardless of project.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
A-13
Glossary
Appendix A
role approver
User who is a signoff in a workflow process with a specific role. In Access Manager,
the role approver accessor is used in Workflow ACLs and matches the sign-off
definition (that is, role in group) for the release level associated with the Workflow
ACL. This accessor ensures that only signoffs are given privileges, not a user who
matches the role. See also approver, group approver, and RIG approver.
role in group
Specific role in a specific group. In Access Manager, role in group is an accessor
used to grant privileges to all users with the same skills and/or responsibilities
in the same group.
role in owning group
Specific role in the objects owning group. In Access Manager, role in owning
group is an accessor used to grant privileges to users with the same skills and/or
responsibilities on the same project. For example, all designers in the owning group
are usually granted write privilege on their development data.
role preference
Teamcenter preference applying to an entire role.
root
Starting point of a hierarchy. Hierarchies are usually displayed as hanging trees
with the root of the structure at the top and the leaves at the bottom.
rule handler
Handler used to integrate workflow business rules into Enterprise Process Modeling
processes at the task level. Rule handlers attach conditions to an action. See also
task handler.
rules-based protection
Conditions or rules that control who can or cannot access objects. These rules are
global (that is, they affect the entire Teamcenter site) and are enforced by the Access
Manager. These rules are defined by a system administrator.
rule tree
Access Manager component the system administrator uses to grant users access to
Teamcenter objects. It is a tree of rules and access permissions that when processed
determines the access that each user has to a specified object.
S
Security Services
Services that eliminate prompts for logon credentials when users switch Teamcenter
products within a user session. Authentication is performed by an external identity
service provider, such as lightweight directory access protocol (LDAP), instead of
the Teamcenter product. At a site that deploys multiple Teamcenter products and
Security Services, users log on once to access all participating Teamcenter products.
signal
Physical representation of a message or an information flow being generated,
processed, or conveyed within an electrotechnical system.
A-14
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Glossary
site
Individual installation of Teamcenter comprising a single Teamcenter database,
all users accessing that database, and additional resources such as hardware,
networking capabilities, and third-party software applications (tools) required to
implement Teamcenter at that site.
site ID
Unique identifier of a Teamcenter site. The site ID is used to generate internal
identifiers for Teamcenter objects that must be unique throughout an enterprise.
Once established, site IDs should not be modified.
site name
Unique name of a Teamcenter site stored in the database as a user-defined character
string.
site preference
Teamcenter preference that applies to the entire site.
smart folder
Pseudofolders configured in a hierarchical structure used to apply hierarchical levels
of filtering to project data. See also pseudofolder.
STEP AP212
Standard for the Exchange of Product Model Data (STEP) for the Industrial
Automation Systems and Integration Product Data Representation and Exchange
international standard (ISO 10303). This standard provides a framework through
which industries can exchange and share product information within and between
enterprises. AP212 is an application of this standard and describes the information
necessary to customize electrotechnical products.
structure context
BOM or assembly structure contained in a collaboration context. The structure
context can contain occurrence groups, items, and item revisions. See also
collaboration context.
Structure Manager
Teamcenter application that enables creation of generic product structures that can
be configured to show the product structure that is in production, effective on a
certain date, used by a particular customer, and so forth. Structure Manager enables
creation and modification of a product structure and its associated occurrence data,
display of a product structure in a multilevel indented format, and viewing graphics
tightly coupled to the structure for easy identification of a component by location in
the structure or in the embedded viewer.
subscription
Combination of a workspace object and an event for which a Teamcenter user
requests notification of occurrence. Teamcenter notifies a subscribed user when the
event occurs in association with the object. Users can subscribe to objects from
Teamcenter applications, such as My Teamcenter and Structure Manager.
Subscription Manager
Tool used to find, delete, and modify active subscriptions.
system administrator
Teamcenter user who is a member of the system administration group.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
A-15
Glossary
Appendix A
T
task (workflow)
Fundamental building block used to construct a process. Each task defines a set of
actions, rules, and resources used to accomplish that task.
task handler
Small Integration Toolkit program or function. Handlers are the lowest level
building blocks in Enterprise Process Modeling. They are used to extend and
customize tasks. There are two kinds of handlers: action handlers and rule handlers.
See also action handler and rule handler.
task template
Blueprint of a workflow task.
Teamcenter Application Registry
Independent Web-based service that allows a Teamcenter product to look up other
available Teamcenter products for launching a linked object. Administrators can
register and unregister installed instances of a Teamcenter product in the registry.
Teamcenter application root directory
Directory location of the Teamcenter shared binary executables. The TC_ROOT
environment variable defines this location. Generally, the contents of this directory
change only with a new version of Teamcenter.
Teamcenter data directory
Directory location of the Teamcenter shared data subdirectories and files. The
TC_DATA environment variable defines this location. Each data directory is
associated with a single database instance.
Teamcenter option
See preference and user preference.
thin client
Teamcenter user interface that provides a streamlined browser-based view of product
information stored in a Teamcenter database. The thin client is configured in the
Web tier, which creates and serves its Web pages to the client. Compare to rich client.
transfer mode
Objects composed of rules that configure PLM XML import and export operations.
Transfer mode allows users to import and export data with little knowledge other
than the name of the transfer mode object.
translate
Process that converts data from one file format into another file format. In the
context of Teamcenter document management, source data is converted to derived
visualization data formats. The conversion is based on available translators.
Translate is an action on a dataset. Render is an action taken on an object, such as a
document. See render.
type display rule
Business rule that allows an administrator to control the object types that are
available for creation in Teamcenter.
A-16
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Glossary
U
unpublished object
Object not available to other sites in a Multi-Site Collaboration network. Users
can unpublish previously published objects so they are once again accessible only
to the owning site.
user
Definition that is the mechanism by which Teamcenter identifies and interacts with
each user. User definitions contain a name (derived from the person definition), user
ID, operating system name, and password.
user preference
Teamcenter preference applying to a specific user.
V
variant condition
variant rule
Collection of option values used in determining the variant of the BOM to be
configured (for example, car type = GLS, engine = 1200, gearbox = manual).
vendor
Business object type; provider of parts or services. In Teamcenter, a vendor can take
on one or more roles. Role definitions are not fixed in the data model, and can be
adjusted to meet customer business mode. Vendor roles, for example, can include:
vendor management
Software functionality used to model vendor contributions to a product by letting
users capture information about the vendors and the vendor parts they provide to
satisfy the form, fit, and function of commercial parts.
VendorPart
Business object type that is related to a CommercialPart object type by a Satisfies
relation. A vendor part can be obtained from one or more vendors, but the actual
builder of the part assigns a part number.
view
Software element in a rich client user interface perspective. It provides the ability to
navigate hierarchies of information, display information about selected objects, open
an editor, or display properties. See also perspective.
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
A-17
Glossary
Appendix A
W
work context
Object containing user, group, role, and project requirements for a particular task.
Work contexts streamline the definition of the correct user settings required to
perform tasks. For example, a user typically assigned three types of tasks can create
three work contexts reflecting the required group/role settings. Rather than logging
out and logging back in with the required group/role settings, right-clicking a task
displays the users defined work contexts. Selecting the appropriate work context
automatically changes the users group/role settings. Work contexts can also define
the current project, if project functionality is used at the site.
workflow
Automation of the concept that all work flows through one or more business
processes to accomplish an objective. Using workflow, documents, information, and
tasks are passed between participants during the completion of a particular process.
Workflow Designer
Teamcenter application that enables administrators to graphically design workflow
process templates, incorporating company business practices and procedures into
the templates. Teamcenter users initiate workflow processes using these templates.
Workflow Viewer
Teamcenter application that enables users to view the progress of a workflow
process. Users are not required to be participating members of the process being
viewed. Depending on preference settings, Workflow Viewer also allows ad hoc
process modification. See also ad hoc process modification.
working revision
Revision that can be changed by a user with write privileges. No record of
intermediate states of a working revision is maintained by Teamcenter.
world
All users regardless of group or role.
A-18
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Index
A
Aborted tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aborting processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access control entries (ACEs)
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access control entry (ACE) . . . . . . . . .
Access control list (ACL) . . . . . . . . . .
Access menu command . . . . . . . . . . .
Access privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of viewing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access shortcut menu command . . . . .
Access toolbar button . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessor precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACE (access control entry) . . . . . . . . .
ACL (access control list) . . . . . . . . . . .
Actions menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ad hoc signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADA, see Authorized data access
Add Design to Product menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Design to Product shortcut menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Design toolbar button . . . . . . . . .
Add Part to Product menu command . .
Add Part to Product shortcut menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Part toolbar button . . . . . . . . . . .
Add To Favorites shortcut menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding
Access control entries (ACEs) . . . . .
Address list menu command . . . . . . .
Address lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding members . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing members . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administration Console menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AE_dataset_default_keep_limit
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLM00046 I
. 13-4
. 2-41
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4-7
. 4-8
. 4-9
. 4-2
. 4-2
2-27
. 4-3
. 4-5
. 4-5
2-39
2-41
. 4-3
. 4-3
. 4-2
. 4-2
2-32
13-8
. 2-29
. 2-39
. 2-42
. 2-29
. 2-39
. 2-42
. 2-40
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4-7
2-30
2-44
2-44
2-44
2-44
. 2-35
. . 9-1
My Teamcenter Guide
Index-1
Index
Index-2
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Index
PLM00046 I
Custom notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add or edit custom note text . . . .
Attach a custom note . . . . . . . . .
Create a custom note . . . . . . . . .
Delete a custom note . . . . . . . . .
Revise a custom note . . . . . . . . .
Customizing
Implicit checkout . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cut menu command . . . . . . . . . . .
Cut shortcut menu command . . . . .
Cut toolbar button . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cutting objects from your workspace
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21-11
21-13
21-13
21-12
21-16
21-15
.
.
.
.
.
10-3
2-23
2-36
2-41
2-41
D
Data
Checkin and checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Data model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Data replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Data synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Data, requirement properties
Export
Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Dataset file
Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Dataset identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Dataset references
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Dataset versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dataset versions, displaying latest . . . . . 9-2
Dataset, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Datasets
Create by drag and drop . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Create by menu commands . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Create by Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Default version limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Purging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2, 9-8
Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
UGALTREP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
UGMASTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Viewing named references . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Date property
Value, changing
Live Excel interface . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Deep copy rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Default display identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
defaultViewerConfig_VIEWERCONFIG
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
My Teamcenter Guide
Index-3
Index
Defining
Attached data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Checkout directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Defining object, trace link . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Defining objects
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Delete
Workflow process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
Delete menu command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Delete toolbar button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Deleting
Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Work contexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
Deleting address lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Deleting datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Design
Associate with part globally . . . . . . . 24-2
Delete association with part . . . . . . . 24-3
Maturity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-224-3
View from part revision . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
Viewing positioned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3
Design, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Details table
Customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Diagramming menu command . . . . . . . 2-18
Dialog boxes
Create Trace Link with Subtype . . . . 21-7
Export To Excel . . 3-11, 13-57, 13-62, 21-9
Export to Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
New item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Differences between implicit and explicit
checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Direct trace links
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Dispatcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Display rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Alias identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Alternate identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Displaying
Alias identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Alternate identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Distributor vendor role . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
DMTemplate, new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Do tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Document management
Document behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Generating thumbnail graphics . . . . . 6-11
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Document templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Document, new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Documentation, manufacturing . . . . . . 20-1
Index-4
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Index
Program view . . . . . . . . .
Export to
SRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export To Excel dialog box . .
13-57, 13-62, 21-9
Export to Word dialog box . .
Exporting
Bills of materials . . . . . . .
Checked-out objects . . . . .
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . .
Objects in projects . . . . . .
PLM XML format . . . . . . .
Program view . . . . . . . . .
Released objects . . . . . . . .
Workflow targets . . . . . . .
Exporting objects
Application interface mode
STEP format . . . . . . . . . .
Teamcenter objects . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 22-14
. . . . . . . . 11-2
. . . . . . . 3-11,
. . . . . . . . 11-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-15
11-15
22-14
11-16
. 11-9
22-14
11-15
11-15
. . . . . . . 11-10
. . . . . . . . 11-3
. . . . . . . . 11-2
F
Failed tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Date Scheduling option
Folder, new . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folders toolbar button . . . . . .
Form, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forms, comparing . . . . . . . . .
Forward toolbar button . . . . .
Full Screen menu command . .
Functionality, new . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-4
2-17
22-4
2-19
2-42
2-19
16-4
2-42
2-34
2-23
G
Gantt chart
Grouping condition removing
tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduling information display
GDE_exclude_list preference . . .
GDELink objects . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generate a traceability report . .
Generate import report option . .
Generate report . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generate Report shortcut menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generic page, adding to portfolio
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
22-13
22-11
. 25-1
. 25-3
. 21-8
. 11-8
. 23-2
. . . . . 2-37
. . . . . 20-8
H
Has Tracelink, property column
Objects in My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . 21-7
Help menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Home folder toolbar button . . . . . . . . . 2-41
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
. . 2-27
. . 2-19
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
19-1
19-1
19-2
19-2
. 8-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 8-2
. 8-3
. 8-2
10-2
10-3
2-30
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-15
. 11-8
. 11-8
. 11-7
11-16
11-11
. 11-8
11-13
. 11-8
. 11-14
. 11-14
. . 21-9
. . 3-10
. . 2-21
. . 2-30
. . 2-39
. 12-18
. . . 1-1
. . . 6-3
. . 22-5
. . 2-22
. . . 5-6
. . 2-20
. . 25-1
. . . 8-2
. . 12-9
Index-5
Index
Generate report . . . . . . . . . . .
Rich client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item revision display
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item revision display rules
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item revisions
Copying related datasets . . . .
Default display identifier . . . .
Display rules . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item structure
Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item, new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Items
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating based on another item
Default display identifier . . . .
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 23-2
. . . . . 23-3
. . . . . 5-15
. . . . . 5-11
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5-16
. 8-6
. 5-9
5-14
. . . . . . 5-2
. . . . . 2-23
. . . . . 2-19
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 5-2
5-18
. 8-6
5-14
5-28
J
JtSimplification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
L
Latest menu command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
License shortcut menu command . . . . . 2-39
Linking workspace objects, trace
links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Live Excel
Export
Traceability report . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Live Excel interface, Create
spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Live Integration with Word, export output
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Live options, Export to Excel dialog
box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Localization menu command . . . . . . . . 2-31
M
Mail
Address lists
Adding members . . . . .
Removing members . . .
Creating address lists . . . . .
Modifying address lists . . . .
Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using address lists . . . . . . .
Make Immune menu command
Index-6
My Teamcenter Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-44
2-44
2-44
2-44
2-43
2-44
2-25
PLM00046 I
Index
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOM view revision . . . . . . .
CAE Item . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collaboration Context . . . .
Configuration Context . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dataset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Definition . . . . . .
Issue Report . . . . . . . . . . .
Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Item Element . . . . . . . . . .
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Management . . .
Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process Variable . . . . . . . .
Product Variant . . . . . . . . .
Product Variant Intent . . . .
Review package . . . . . . . . .
Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Catalog . . . . . . . . .
Service Request . . . . . . . . .
Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Design Component
Structure Context . . . . . . .
URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vendor Management . . . . .
Work Context . . . . . . . . . .
Workflow Process . . . . . . . .
Workflow Sub-Process . . . .
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Live Excel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Perspective . . . . . . . . . . .
Open With . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Override Word templates . . . . .
Part/Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paste Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process & Change Selector . . . .
Process Assignment List . . . . . .
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Properties on Relation . . . . . . .
Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLM00046 I
. . . . 2-17
. . . . 2-20
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-20
. . . . 2-20
. . . . 2-21
. . . . 2-19
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-19
. . . . 2-19
. . . . 2-19
. . . . 2-21
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-19
. . . . 2-20
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-21
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-23
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-21
. . . . 2-21
. . . . 2-21
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-20
. . . . 2-19
. . . . 2-22
. . . . 2-21
. . . . 2-21
. . . . 2-21
. . . . 2-17
. . . . 2-31
. . . . 2-33
. . . . 2-17
. . . . 2-26
. . . . 2-27
. . . . 2-30
. . . . 2-32
. . . . 2-24
. . . . 2-24
. . . . 2-34
. . . . 2-18
. . . . 2-18
. . . . 2-28
. . . . 2-31
. . . . 2-28
2-24, 2-27
. . . . 2-25
. . . . 2-25
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refresh Window . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Inbox Subscription . . . .
Replace ParametricRequirement
Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Perspective . . . . . . . . . . .
Resource Pool Subscription . . . .
Review Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Perspective As . . . . . . . . .
Send Additional Data To . . . . . .
Send Data To . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Site CheckInOut . . . . . . . . . . .
Subscribe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subscription Manager . . . . . . .
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traceability Reports . . . . . . . . .
Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Validate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vendor Management . . . . . . . .
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Markup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View With . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifying
Access control entries (ACEs) . .
Dataset contents . . . . . . . . . . .
Object properties . . . . . . . . . . .
Process assignment lists . . . . . .
Relation object properties . . . . .
Single object properties . . . . . .
Modifying multiple objects . . . . . .
Modifying single object . . . . . . . .
Move menu command . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Site Collaboration . . . . . . .
Best practices . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data synchronization . . . . . . . .
Importing remote objects . . . . .
Object protection and ownership
. . . . 2-27
. . . . 2-27
. . . . 2-28
. . . . 2-26
. . . . 2-31
. . . . 2-33
. . . . 2-28
. . . . 2-28
. . . . 2-18
. . . . 2-18
. . . . 2-18
. . . . 2-33
. . . . 2-30
. . . . 2-30
. . . . 2-33
. . . . 2-31
. . . . 2-28
. . . . 2-28
. . . . 2-34
. . . . 2-31
. . . . 2-35
. . . . 2-26
. . . . 2-28
. . . . 2-30
. . . . 2-17
. . . . 2-18
. . . . 2-17
. . . . 2-17
. . . . 2-32
. . . . 2-23
. . . . 2-17
. . . . 2-35
. . . . 2-17
. . . . 2-36
. . . . 2-27
2-342-35
. . . . 2-26
. . . . 2-33
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
My Teamcenter Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 4-8
. . 9-2
. . 3-4
13-36
. 3-16
. . 3-2
. 3-16
. 3-16
. . 2-3
11-17
11-17
11-17
11-13
11-17
Index-7
Index
. . . . 2-30
menu
. . . . 2-40
. . . . 14-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 2-1
. 2-1
. 1-2
2-17
. 1-2
. 2-1
. 1-2
. 1-2
. 1-1
2-36
2-40
. . . . 2-35
. . . . . 2-2
N
Named references
Downloading files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Underscores in file names . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Uploading files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Zero-length files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Named references menu command . . . . 2-27
Navigation Pane menu command . . . . . 2-34
Navigator Pane toolbar button . . . . . . . 2-42
New Change in context shortcut menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
New Item
DMTemplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
RequirementSpec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
New item dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
New menu command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
New shortcut menu command . . . . . . . 2-36
Non-privileged project team member . . 14-2
Nonrevisable connections, creating GDELink
objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
Notification
Audit log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Numeric property
Value, changing
Live Excel interface . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Index-8
My Teamcenter Guide
NX Check-Mate
Log file viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
O
Object
Check in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object ownership
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing single object . . . . . . .
Object protection
Accessor precedence . . . . . . . . .
Accessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default access privileges . . . . . .
Site ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object protection and ownership . .
Object-based protection . . . . . . . .
Objects
Changing ownership . . . . . . . .
Complying, trace link . . . . . . . .
Defining, trace link . . . . . . . . .
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source, trace link . . . . . . . . . . .
Subtypes
Trace links . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target, trace link . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace links
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct, symbol . . . . . . . . . .
Indirect. symbol . . . . . . . .
Traceability report, generate
Objects in projects
Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offline
Live Word document . . . . . . . . .
Online help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open Inbox toolbar button . . . . . .
Open Live Excel menu command .
Open menu command . . . . . . . . .
Open Perspective menu command .
Open toolbar button . . . . . . . . . .
Open With menu command . . . . .
Opening
Item revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening dataset versions . . . . . . .
Options
My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options menu command . . . . . . .
Organization menu command . . . .
Other (Business Object), New . . . .
Out of office assistant . . . . . . . . .
Out of office status . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 10-5
. . . . 10-4
. . . . . 4-9
. . . . 4-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 4-3
. 4-3
. 4-3
. 4-4
11-17
. . 4-2
.
.
.
.
.
4-94-10
. . . 21-4
. . . 21-4
. . . 11-7
. . . 21-4
. . . . 21-5
. . . . 21-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21-6
21-9
21-9
21-8
. . . . 14-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11-5
2-35
2-41
2-31
2-17
2-33
2-41
2-17
. . . . 5-14
. . . . 5-14
. . . . . 9-7
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1-2
2-26
2-27
2-22
13-49
13-49
PLM00046 I
Index
Output mode
Export Markup
Word export . . . . . . . . . .
Live Integration with Word . . .
Static Snapshot
Word export . . . . . . . . . .
Override
Create approval process . . . . .
Create request . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete request . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit request . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform approval task . . . . . .
Review request using interface
Review request using workflow
Validation failure . . . . . . . . . .
View request status . . . . . . . .
Override Word templates menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview
My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner
Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 11-5
. . . . . 11-4
. . . . . 11-4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12-13
12-10
12-12
12-11
12-13
12-12
12-13
. 12-9
12-11
. . . . . 2-30
. . . . . . 2-1
. . . . . 10-4
P
Paragraph
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paragraph, new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paragraph, requirement subtype
Editing properties, Client for Office
Paragraphs
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Management, New . . . . .
Parametric requirement text syntax .
Parametric requirements
Create a parametric requirement
item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replace parametric requirement
revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revise a parametric requirement . .
Part
Associate with design globally . . . .
Delete association with design . . . .
Make a primary design revision . .
View properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part attributes, validating . . . . . . . .
Part, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part/Design menu command . . . . . .
Paste command
Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paste menu command . . . . . . . . . . .
Paste shortcut menu command . . . . .
Paste toolbar button . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLM00046 I
. . 21-3
. . 2-23
. . 3-14
. . 21-1
. . 2-22
. 21-17
. 21-18
. 21-19
. 21-22
. 21-21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
24-2
24-3
24-3
24-3
12-1
2-22
2-32
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 5-7
2-24
2-37
2-41
Paused tasks
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
PDX
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Pending tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Perform command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Perform dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Perform Task toolbar button . . . . . . . . 2-41
perform-signoffs tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Perspectives
In general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Pin to Launch Pad shortcut menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
PLM XML
Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
PLM XML files
Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Portfolios
Adding generic page . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Adding work instruction . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Container nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Exporting as HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Exporting as PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
Headers and footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Modify header and footer . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4, 20-6
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Positioned design, viewing . . . . . . . . . . 24-3
Preference
VIS_simpgen_admin_group . . . . . . . 9-14
Preferences
AE_dataset_default_keep_limit . . . . . . 9-1
AE_dataset_id_usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Baseline_auto_remote_checkout_
allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
defaultViewerConfig_
VIEWERCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
EPM_adhoc_signoffs . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
EPM_valid_user_to_apply_assignment_
list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
GDE_exclude_list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
scheduling_graph_dataSource . . . . . . 22-9
scheduling_graph_dataSource_
filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
scheduling_graph_date_format . . . . . 22-9
scheduling_graph_domain_
interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
scheduling_graph_domain_label_
vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
scheduling_graph_font_name . . . . . . 22-9
My Teamcenter Guide
Index-9
Index
scheduling_graph_font_size . . . . . . 22-10
scheduling_graph_font_style . . . . . . 22-10
scheduling_graph_histogram_single_
color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
scheduling_graph_reference_
calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
scheduling_graph_task_legend . . . . 22-10
scheduling_graph_view . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
TC_Auto_Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
TC_current_role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
TC_Dataset_Import_Exclude_
Wildcard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
TC_refresh_notify_pull_time_
interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
TC_refresh_notify_subscribe_to_
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
TC_relation_required_on_export . . . 11-14
TC_relation_required_on_
transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
TC_Role-Type_info_form . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
TC_suppress_Edit_Latest_Menu . . . 2-25,
9-2
TC_VALIDATION_FILE_TYPES . . 12-18
TC_wc_setting_modifiable_
default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
TCCheckoutReserveOnly . . . . . . . . 10-10
TCDefaultKeepLimit . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
TCDefaultKeepLimitByType . . . . . . 10-10
<TypeName>_subscribe_to_events . . 15-5
<viewer-configID>.VIEWERCONFIG . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Viewer.VIEWERCONFIGTOLOAD . . 2-15
Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Preferences command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Prefix property value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Prerequisites, My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . 1-2
Preview import report option . . . . . . . . 11-8
Primary design revision . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-3
Print menu command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Print preview
Program view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Program view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
Privileged team member . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Privileged user
Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Process & change selector menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Process Assignment List menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Process assignment lists . . . . . 13-28, 13-34
Assigning responsible parties . . . . . 13-23,
13-29, 13-3513-36
Index-10
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Index
PLM00046 I
Related objects
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Relation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Relation object properties . . . . . . 3-153-16
Relation properties
Create query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Relations
Automatically defined . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Created by Paste command . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Item and item revision . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
TC_WorkContext_Relation . . . . . . . 13-41
Remote Inbox Subscription menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Remote inboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
Checking out data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-52
Export data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
Subscribing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-52
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
Remove Immunity menu command . . . . 2-25
Remove Immunity shortcut menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Removing
Access control entries (ACEs) . . . . . . . 4-9
Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Objects from projects . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Work contexts from objects . . . . . . . 13-42
Renaming
Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Replace ParametricRequirement Revision
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Replacing part instances
In a single stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Replacing part instances in a single
step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Report Builder application . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Report Builder reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Rich client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4
Report Builder validation reports . . . . . 12-9
Report Generation Wizard . . . . . . 2-37, 23-2
Report Generator application . . . . . . . . 23-2
Report, traceability, generate . . . . . . . . 21-8
Reports
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37, 23-2
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Menu command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
Report Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
Search compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
My Teamcenter Guide
Index-11
Index
Index-12
My Teamcenter Guide
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-23
25-2
5-21
2-18
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
23-3
. 1-1
23-4
. 1-2
. 1-3
13-15
. . . . . 4-2
. . . . . 4-6
. . . . . 4-2
S
Save as menu command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Save menu command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Save Perspective As menu command . . . 2-33
Saving as program view . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
Saving program view . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-14
Schedule options
Are notifications enabled . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Is Schedule Public . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Published . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Schedule Task Execution
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
Schedule templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
Schedule view options, Finish Date
Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4
Schedule view options, Is Percent Linked to
Work Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Schedule, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Schedules
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7
Schedule options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Schedule view options . . . . . . . 22-422-5
Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
scheduling_graph_dataSource
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
scheduling_graph_dataSource_filter
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
scheduling_graph_date_format
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
scheduling_graph_domain_interval
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
scheduling_graph_domain_label_vertical
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
scheduling_graph_font_name
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9
PLM00046 I
Index
scheduling_graph_font_size
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
scheduling_graph_font_style
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
scheduling_graph_histogram_single_color
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
scheduling_graph_reference_calendar
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
scheduling_graph_task_legend
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10
scheduling_graph_view preference . . . 22-10
Search
Alternate ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Search enhancements
TC_QRY_xxx_REVRULE
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Search for schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5
Search toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Searching
Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-515-6
Selecting related components . . . . . . . . 3-3,
3-5, 4-11, 5-30, 8-9, 10-4, 10-6
Send Additional Data To menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Send Data To menu command . . . . . . . 2-30
Send To shortcut menu command . . . . . 2-37
Sequences
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Service Catalog, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Service Request, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Shortcut commands
New Change in context . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Add Design to Product . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Add Part to Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Add To Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Check In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Compare Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Copy Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Edit Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Generate Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Internal Trace Report . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Make Immune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Manage Global Alternates . . . . . . . . 2-39
Multisite Synchronization . . . . . . . . . 2-40
New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Pin to Launch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
PLM00046 I
My Teamcenter Guide
Index-13
Index
Index-14
My Teamcenter Guide
Tables
Configure view tables data display . . . 2-9,
13-55
Removing columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Repositioning columns . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Sorting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Target object, trace link . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Task
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
Task attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Task display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Task handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Task Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Task Properties toolbar button . . . . . . . 2-41
Task states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Aborted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Pending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Skipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Suspended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Unassigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Tasks
Assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Delegating to surrogate . . . . . . . . . 13-47
Demoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Promoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Skipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Suspend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Undoing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Tasks to Perform folder . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Tasks to Track folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
TC_Auto_Checkout preference . . . . . . . 10-3
TC_Dataset_Import_Exclude_Wildcard
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
TC_QRY_xxx_REVRULE preference . . . 5-13
TC_refresh_notify_pull_time_interval
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
TC_refresh_notify_subscribe_to_types
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
TC_relation_required_on_export
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
TC_relation_required_on_transfer
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
TC_Role-Type_info_form preference . . . . 7-5
TC_suppress_Edit_Latest_Menu
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25, 9-2
TC_VALIDATION_FILE_TYPES
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
TC_wc_setting_modifiable_default
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
TCCheckoutReserveOnly
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
PLM00046 I
Index
TCDefaultKeepLimit preference . . . .
TCDefaultKeepLimitByType
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Team members
Privileged team member . . . . . . . .
Program team administrators . . . .
Project administrator . . . . . . . . . .
Project team administrators . . . . .
Teamcenter Integration for NX . . . . .
Teamcenter Integration for NX I-deas
Teamcenter perspectives and views . .
Template schedule option . . . . . . . . .
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text property
Value, changing
Live Excel interface . . . . . . . .
Thumbnail graphics
Generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thumbnails
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toolbar
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Home folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigator Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Perform Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simple Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toolbar menu command . . . . . . . . . .
Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace links
Complying object . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLM00046 I
. . 10-9
. 10-10
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14-2
14-2
14-2
14-2
2-42
2-42
. 1-2
22-3
22-2
22-3
. . 3-12
. . 6-11
. . 6-12
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2-41
2-42
2-42
2-42
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-42
2-42
2-41
2-41
2-40
2-42
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-41
2-42
2-42
2-41
2-41
2-40
2-34
2-27
.
.
.
.
. 21-4
. 21-6
. 21-4
21-10
. . 21-9
Indirect
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Source object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Subtypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-5
Target object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4
Traceability report
Generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Traceability report
Export to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-9
Generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8
Traceability report menu command . . . 2-31
Tracing downstream and upstream
paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-7
Transferring checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Translate
CAD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
CAD to PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
dataset files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
JtSimplification . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-139-14
Simpgen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Translate menu command . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Translation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-342-35
Troubleshooting
Internet Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Validation report file . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
<TypeName>_subscribe_to_events
preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
U
UGALTREP datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UGMASTER datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unassigned tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Undo command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Resource Locator (URL)
Naming restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) objects
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unpin from Launch Pad shortcut menu
command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uploading named reference files . . . . . .
URL (uniform resource locator)
Naming restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
URL (uniform resource locator) objects
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
URL objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
URL, New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User interface
Schedule Task Execution . . . . . . . . .
User Interface
My Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
My Teamcenter Guide
. 9-2
. 9-2
13-4
2-32
17-1
17-2
17-1
2-37
9-10
17-1
17-2
17-1
17-1
17-1
2-19
22-7
. 2-2
Index-15
Index
. . . . . . . . 2-26
. . . . . . . . . 5-7
. . . . . . . . 9-11
. . . . . . . . 9-15
. . . . 9-149-15
V
Validate menu command . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Validation
Agent selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Part attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Report file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Results in a workflow . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Validation Manager
Part attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Validation reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Vendor business object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Vendor management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Bid package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Bid Package Line Item . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Business object types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Commercial parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Objects you work with . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Vendor object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Vendor parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Vendor parts, associate . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Vendor role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Vendor roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Vendor Management menu command . . 2-30
Vendor Management, New . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Vendor objects, creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Vendor parts
Classifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Vendor roles
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Distributor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Supplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
VendorPart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
VendorPart business object . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Vendors
Associating quality documents . . . . . 7-13
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
View audit logs . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58, 13-62
Audit queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61
Index-16
My Teamcenter Guide
PLM00046 I
Index
Work contexts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing from objects . . . . . . .
Work instructions
Adding to portfolio . . . . . . . . . .
Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abort tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ad hoc signoff teams . . . . . . . .
Assigning a task . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning all tasks . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning tasks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assigning tasks to resource pools
Completing custom tasks . . . . .
Completing do tasks . . . . . . . . .
Completing manual condition
tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing perform-signoffs
tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing route tasks . . . . . . .
Defining surrogate users . . . . . .
Demoting tasks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initiating processes . . . . . . . . .
Out of office assistant . . . . . . . .
Privileged user . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process assignment lists . . . . . .
Process initiator . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process templates . . . . . . . . . .
Reassigning a task . . . . . . . . . .
Resource pools . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resume tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLM00046 I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-41
13-42
13-41
13-42
13-42
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 20-4
. 13-1
13-19
. 13-8
13-30
13-28
13-28
13-43
13-15
13-13
. . . 13-14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13-11
13-15
13-44
13-18
13-22
13-49
13-17
13-34
. 13-4
13-21
13-30
13-43
13-19
My Teamcenter Guide
Index-17